JP6862383B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a variable display.

Some conventional gaming machines include a movable body capable of performing a specific operation, and the movable body operates at the start of variable display (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-134812

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the game entertainment cannot be improved because the timing of operating the movable body is constant regardless of the effect of the variable display immediately before the movable body is operated.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the means A of the present invention is
It is a game machine that can play games with variable display.
Movable bodies that can perform specific actions and
When executing a specific variable display by a specific variable display pattern among a plurality of variable display patterns, it is possible to execute a movable body effect that operates the movable body from the first timing after the start of the variable display in the specific variable display. Movable body production execution means and
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the movable body effect,
With
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display in a variable display different from the specific variable display, the movable body effect executing means is the first in the specific variable display. The movable body effect can be executed from the second timing, which is a timing before the timing.
further,
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage,
Display means that can display images and
A hold display means capable of causing the display means to display a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means, and a hold display means.
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a difficult-to-see effect that makes a predetermined image displayed on the display means difficult to see.
The effect executing means is characterized in that, as the difficult-to-see effect, a first difficult-to-see effect that does not make the hold display difficult to see and a second difficult-to-see effect that makes the hold display difficult to see can be executed. There is.
In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the means 1 of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A movable body (for example, a movable accessory 400) capable of performing a specific operation (for example, movement between a retracted position and an effect position), and
When executing a specific variable display by a specific variable display pattern (for example, a super reach variation pattern including a special reach variation pattern) among a plurality of variable display patterns, the first timing of the specific variable display (for example, the variation display) Movable body effect executing means capable of executing the movable body effect to operate the movable body from (timing 1 second after the start) (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect symbol change start process and the effect symbol change process). When,
A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the countdown advance notice effect process) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a countdown advance notice effect) different from the movable body effect.
With
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display, the movable body effect executing means starts from a second timing (for example, the start timing of the variable display) different from the first timing. The movable body effect can be executed,
further,
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an effect display device 909) and
Information about the game (for example, an interface image including a hold display, an effect probability variation counter image, and a right-handed promotion notification image. In addition, information about a controlled effect mode (for example, a mode name)) is output to the display means. Information about the voice (for example, song title), information about the service using the communication terminal (for example, earned points, items, two-dimensional code), effect display associated with driving the movable accessory, and achievement of the mission. Information on mission display (for example, "I saw Super Reach A", "I saw Reach continuously"), active display corresponding to the fluctuation during execution, operation promotion display, how to play and explanation of production. (For example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, a portion for displaying the hold display by executing steps S90653, S9066, S90659, S90662, and a step. A part for displaying the effect probability variation counter image by executing S90684D, and a part for displaying the right-handed promotion notification image by executing step S90684A).
Steps S904510 and S904514 in the effect control microcomputer 90100 that can execute a difficult-to-see effect (for example, blackout notice) that makes a predetermined image displayed on the display means difficult to see. The part that executes) and
As the difficult-to-see effect, the effect executing means makes it difficult to see the first difficult-to-see effect (for example, an interface image, a right-handed promotion notification image, and an effect probability variation counter image) that do not make the information related to the game difficult to see. The first blackout notice) and the second difficult-to-see effect (for example, the interface image, the right-handed promotion notification image, and the effect probability variation counter image) that make the information related to the game difficult to see are made difficult to see. It is characterized by being able to execute (notice).
According to this feature, the start timing of the movable body effect can be changed depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed in the immediately preceding variable display, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, in the first difficult-to-see production, since the information related to the game is not difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The second timing is characterized in that it is a timing closer to the start timing of the specific variable display (for example, the start timing of the variable display) than the first timing.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the relationship between the specific effect and the movable body effect, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
The first timing is a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start timing of the specific variable display (for example, a timing 1 second after the start of the variable display).
The second timing is characterized in that it is the start timing of the specific variable display (for example, the start timing of the variable display).
According to this feature, the player can more easily recognize the relationship between the specific effect and the movable body effect, and the player can easily recognize that the first timing and the second timing are different timings. Therefore, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage information (for example, a command buffer 194A received at the time of starting winning), and
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variable pattern setting process) and
With respect to the variable display corresponding to the hold storage information, a determination means for determining the variable display pattern before determining the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a random number value determination process at the time of winning).
With
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect at least in the variable display immediately before the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage information of the determination target of the determination means (for example,. After the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the countdown advance notice effect in the pre-reading advance notice effect determination process, the effect symbol change start process and the effect symbol change process are executed to execute the countdown advance notice effect),
The specific effect is a countdown effect that gradually suggests the remaining period until the specific variable display.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player have an expectation that the specific variable display is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage information (for example, a command buffer 194A received at the time of starting winning), and
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a variable pattern setting process) and
With respect to the variable display corresponding to the hold storage information, a determination means for determining the variable display pattern before determining the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a random number value determination process at the time of winning).
With
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect at least in the variable display immediately before the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage information of the determination target of the determination means (for example,. After the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the countdown advance notice effect in the pre-reading advance notice effect determination process, the effect symbol change start process and the effect symbol change process are executed to execute the countdown advance notice effect),
The specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, a chance eye notice effect) and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect (for example, a countdown notice effect).
The movable body effect executing means is
When the first specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display, the movable body effect is executed from the first timing (for example, a special reach variation as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31). When the chance eye notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display of the pattern, the operation of the movable accessory 400 starts from the timing 1 second after the start of the variation display in the variation display of the special reach variation pattern). ,
When the second specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display, the movable body effect is executed from the second timing (for example, the special reach variation as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29). When the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display of the pattern, the operation of the movable accessory 400 starts from the start timing of the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display of the special reach fluctuation pattern).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the timing of starting the movable body effect can be different depending on whether the first specific effect is executed or the second specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display. , You can improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 5.
When the variable display result becomes a specific display result (for example, a big hit), the advantageous state control means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the big hit opening preprocessing and the big hit opening) for controlling the advantageous state (for example, the big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player. It has a middle process, a post-opening process for big hits, and an end process for big hits).
When the specific variable display is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the non-specific variable display is executed (for example, fluctuations in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and super reach β including special reach). The display is the part where the jackpot expectation is higher than the fluctuation display in the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns),
The specific variable display pattern includes a first specific variable display pattern (for example, a special reach variation pattern) that executes the movable body effect during the specific variable display, and a second that does not execute the movable body effect during the specific variable display. It is characterized by including two specific variable display patterns (for example, fluctuation patterns of super reach α and super reach β).
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether or not the movable body effect is executed during the variable display, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6.
The timing for ending the movable body effect is the same between the case where the movable body effect is executed from the second timing and the case where the movable body effect is executed from the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 26). In both the case where the operation of the movable accessory 400 is started from the start timing of the variable display and the case where the operation of the movable accessory 400 is started from the timing 1 second after the start of the variable display, the start of the variable display is 6 seconds. The part that ends the operation of the movable accessory 400 at a later timing)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to standardize the processing after the end of the movable body effect between the case where the movable body effect is executed at the first timing and the case where the movable body effect is executed at the second timing. The processing load involved can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 7.
A driving means for operating the movable body (for example, an accessory drive motor 411) and
A control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) that controls the operation of the movable body by the drive means, and
With
The movable body is provided so as to be movable between an origin position (for example, a retracted position) and a position away from the origin position (for example, an effect position).
The control means
The first motion control for positioning the movable body at the origin position (for example, the portion that executes the non-detection motion control or the detection motion control in the modification 1) and the movable body can operate normally. A second motion control for confirming that (for example, a portion for executing the actual motion check motion control in the modification 1) and a third motion control for performing the movable body effect (for example, the movable body in the embodiment). It is possible to move the accessory 400 from the retracted position to the effect position in the variation display of the special reach variation pattern).
In the second operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate within a range of the first speed and the second speed faster than the first speed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is for checking the actual operation. When the motion control is executed, the movable accessory is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Part to do),
In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 does not detect as the first operation control). When executing the operation control or the operation control at the time of detection, the speed is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). The part that controls the movement of the movable accessory)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first motion control, the movable body operates at a speed at which it can be stopped at any timing, so that it can be safely positioned at the origin position.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 9 to 15. Conventionally, a game machine has been provided with a display means for displaying an image as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-122265 (FIG. 20), and the image displayed on the display means can be visually recognized. There are some that make it difficult to see visually (for example, a blackout notice effect that darkens the display means, an accessory effect that the accessory advances to a position that overlaps the display area of the displayed image), and it is difficult to see. It is possible to execute a plurality of difficult-to-see effects having different degrees of darkening (for example, the degree of darkening, the range in which the display area and the accessory overlap), and after performing the low-degree visual difficulty effects, the visual recognition is performed. There was one that performed a difficult-to-see effect with a high degree of difficulty. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the game interest may be deteriorated because the information about the game becomes difficult to see. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest in the game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the means 9 according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, and the display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an effect display device 909) and the display means relate to the game. Information (for example, an interface image including a hold display, an effect probability change counter image, and a right-handed promotion notification image. In addition, information on a controlled effect mode (for example, a mode name), information on an output sound (for example). For example, song titles), information about services using communication terminals (eg, points earned, items, two-dimensional codes), effect displays associated with driving movable accessories, mission displays indicating that a mission has been achieved (eg, mission display). Information such as "I saw Super Reach A", "I saw the reach continuously"), active display corresponding to the fluctuation during execution, operation promotion display, how to play the game, and explanation of the production may be used. ) Is displayed (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, a portion for displaying the hold display by executing steps S90653, S90656, S90659, S90662, and a portion for displaying the hold display, and by executing step S90684D. The part that displays the effect probability variation counter image, the part that displays the right-handed promotion notification image by executing step S90684A), and the difficult-to-see effect that makes the predetermined image displayed on the display means difficult to see. For example, the effect executing means (for example, the portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 for executing steps S904510 and S904514) that can execute the blackout notice) is provided, and the effect executing means provides information on the game as a difficult-to-see effect. The first difficult-to-see effect (for example, the first blackout notice that makes the image excluding the interface image, the right-handed promotion notification image, and the effect probability variation counter image difficult to see) and the information about the game difficult to see. It is characterized in that a second difficult-to-see effect (for example, a second blackout notice that makes an image including an interface image, a right-handed promotion notification image, and an effect probability variation counter image difficult to see) can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to the means 9, and the effect executing means executes the first difficult-to-see effect more frequently than the second difficult-to-see effect (for example, a microcomputer for effect control). The 90100 always executes the first blackout notice before executing the second blackout notice, and may not execute the second blackout notice even if the first blackout notice is executed. Therefore, the frequency of occurrence may be (1st blackout notice> 2nd blackout). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to the means 9 or the means 10, and the effect executing means is a first effect mode (for example,) in which the second difficult-to-see effect is executed after the first difficult-to-see effect is executed. Either a blackout notice for button effect, a blackout notice for reach) or a second effect mode (for example, a non-suggestion blackout notice) in which the second difficult-to-see effect is not executed after the first difficult-to-see effect is executed. It may be possible to perform an effect that is difficult to see in the effect mode of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

The game machine of the means 12 is the game machine according to any one of the means 9 to 11, and is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the effect is executed. The means can execute a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect) suggesting that the effect is controlled in an advantageous state as a difficult-to-see effect (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is a super PA3'-1 to PA3. Steps S90804 and S908105 can be executed when any of the fluctuation patterns of ′ -4 and PB3 ′ -1 to PB3 ′ -6 is selected), at least when the execution of the specific effect is completed. A special effect executing means (for example, a normal return effect) capable of executing any one of a plurality of types of special effects including one special effect and a second special effect (for example, a normal return effect including a normal return effect A and a normal return effect B). When any of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3'-1, PA3'-2, PB3'-1, PB3'-2, PB3'-5, and PB3'-6 is selected in the effect control microcomputer 90100. , Steps S90804 and S908105) and a notification effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a relief effect) for notifying control to an advantageous state after the special effect is executed. When any of the fluctuation patterns of super PB3'-5 and PB3'-6 is selected in the microcomputer 90100, the notification effect executing means is provided with a special effect (a portion for executing steps S90804 and S908105). The notification effect can be executed at different ratios when the first special effect is executed and when the second special effect is executed by the execution means (for example, the reliability of the jackpot indicated by the super reach effect is Super Reach A. <Because of the configuration in which the normal return effect A is performed when the type of super reach to be executed is super reach A and the normal return effect B is performed when the type of super reach is B, the normal return effect B is performed. The relief effect may be executed at a higher rate when the normal return effect B is performed than when the return effect A is performed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to the means 12, even though it is in a closed state in the abnormality detecting means for detecting the abnormality (for example, in the game control microcomputer 90100). An abnormality detection image (for example, a small abnormality notification display 9025a, medium) indicating that an abnormality has been detected when an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detecting means and a part for detecting that a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening. An abnormality display means (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 for executing step S90664) for displaying the abnormality notification display 9025b and the major abnormality notification display 9025c) is provided, and a difficult-to-see effect is executed. The anomaly detection image that is sometimes displayed is easier to see than the anomaly detection image that is displayed when the difficult-to-see effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 58, a blackout notice is executed. The medium abnormality notification display 9025b and the large abnormality notification display 9025c displayed when the screen is running are easier to see than the small abnormality notification display 9025a displayed when the blackout notification is not executed). May be. According to such a configuration, the occurrence of an abnormality can be suitably notified.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to the means 13 and is capable of executing the variable display, and is a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, a hold display, an active display). The display) is at least a normal mode (for example, "white"), a first specific mode (for example, "red") having a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (for example, "red") that suggests the content of the effect. Specific display means that can be displayed in any display mode including (special suggestion mode) (for example, "white" or "red" in the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the first modification 1 or hold display in the special suggestion mode (See FIG. 59)) and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, special in the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the first modification). The specific display means includes a portion (see FIGS. 59 (5) and (6)) in which the special zone effect suggested in the suggestion mode can be executed, and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode. , The display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed (for example, the effect of the modification 1). As shown in FIG. 59, the control microcomputer 90100 can change the hold display 9053 displayed in the special suggestion mode to "red" 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started). Good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific aspect.

The gaming machine of the means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 9 to 14, and is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and is a specific display capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display. After displaying the specific display by the display means (for example, the portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the second modification 2 capable of displaying the hold display or the active display) and the first aspect (for example, special hold), the specific display (For example, any of the change effects shown in FIGS. 62 and 63 in the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the second modification 2), which can execute a change effect (for example, a hold notice effect accompanied by an action effect) that changes the display mode of A portion that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display in the change pattern), and the change effect executing means displays the specific display according to the first aspect as the change effect, and then displays the specific display mode. It is possible to execute an effect of changing the above to a second mode (for example, blue hold or red hold) having a high degree of advantage (for example, change patterns 33 to 36 and FIGS. 63 (G) shown in FIGS. 62 (D) and 62 (E)). ) To (I), it is possible to execute the hold notice effect based on the change patterns 405 to 414), and as the change effect, after displaying the specific display by the first aspect, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the second aspect. It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (for example, normal hold) when the specific display is not changed to (for example, change patterns 31, 32 and 63 (for example) shown in FIG. 62 (C)). The hold notice effect based on the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in F) can be executed), and the specific display displayed by the third aspect changes to the second aspect more than the specific display displayed by the first aspect. Is low (for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the change pattern in which the special hold changes to the normal hold and then changes to the red hold is a super reach jackpot with 4 first hold memories at the start winning. There are only change patterns 411 and 414 that can be selected only in the case, and the allocation of judgment values is extremely small. The change patterns 31, 32, 401 to 404, which normally remain on hold and do not change, have more determination values. After changing from hold to normal hold, it may not change to red hold.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice effect decision processing. It is a figure which shows the example of the decision ratio in S245. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect symbol variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during the production symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the countdown notice effect processing. (A) is a timing chart in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, and (B) is a timing chart in the fluctuation pattern of super reach β. (A) is a timing chart in the fluctuation pattern of the special reach when the countdown notice effect is not executed due to the immediately preceding fluctuation, and (B) is the timing chart in the fluctuation pattern of the special reach when the countdown notice effect is executed due to the immediately preceding fluctuation. It is a timing chart. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device in the variation pattern of the special reach when the countdown notice effect is not executed by the variation just before. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device in the variation pattern of the special reach in the case of executing the countdown notice effect by the variation just before. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device in the variation pattern of the special reach in the case of executing the countdown notice effect by the variation just before. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device in the variation pattern of the special reach in the case of execution of the chance eye notice effect by the variation just before. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device in the variation pattern of the special reach in the case of execution of the chance eye notice effect by the variation just before. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for confirmation of actual operation in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for confirmation of actual operation in a modification. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a game control microcomputer executes. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production content in the fluctuation pattern with super reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the button effect execution lottery table, the blackout notice execution lottery table for button effect, the blackout notice execution lottery table for reach, and the non-suggestion blackout notice execution lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effect symbol change in the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation stop process in the effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example at the time of executing a blackout notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the effect display apparatus 909 in the case of performing the off display after super reach A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the effect display apparatus 909 in the case of performing the off display after super reach B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the effect display apparatus 909 when the abnormality notification display is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the special suggestion mode in the modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table in the modification 2.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 1 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be described as the rear (rear) side. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is a facing surface facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step of the flowchart in this embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1".

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a game machine) is roughly divided into a game board 2 (gauge board) constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame 3 (underframe) for supporting and fixing the game board 2. ) And. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are each composed of, for example, 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and are identified in a special symbol game which is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is displayed in a variable manner (also referred to as a variable display or a variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variablely display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols.

A symbol number corresponding to each of the plurality of types of special symbols is assigned. As an example, each of the numbers indicating "0" to "9" is assigned a symbol number of "0" to "9", and the symbol indicating "-" is assigned a symbol number of "10". Just do it. In the following, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol". .. In this embodiment, a form in which a special symbol is used as a plurality of types of identification information such as characters and symbols that can be identified is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a special symbol is used. The symbol may be a difficult-to-identify one or an indistinguishable one which does not have a certain rule by combining a plurality of dot displays.

Both the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are formed in a square shape, for example. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating "0" to "9" and a symbol indicating "-"), and the types may be the same. It may be different.

An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B in the special symbol game are supported. In the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, the effect symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them, are variablely displayed. The variable display of this effect symbol is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B is started. Fluctuations (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) of the effect symbols (also referred to as decorative symbols) are started in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display device 5. , The final stop symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the effect symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified by each are displayed in a variable manner, and a definite effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “deriving”). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols is to end the variable display by displaying the identification information such as the effect symbols as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display). .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the derivation display of the final effect symbol that is the variable display result, the variable speed of the effect symbol becomes "0", and the effect is produced. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the effect symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the effect symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

For example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters) are included in the effect symbols that are variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. , Characters and other symbols, or decorative images showing any other figure). Each of the production symbols is given a corresponding symbol number. For example, a symbol number of "1" to "8" is assigned to each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8". The production symbols are not limited to eight types, and may be any number of types as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as "big hit" combinations and "missing" combinations can be configured (for example, seven types). 9 types, etc.).

After the variable display of the effect symbol is started, until the final effect symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, each effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" In, for example, a scroll display is performed in which the symbol numbers flow from the upper to the lower in order from the smaller one to the larger one, and when the effect symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the process continues. The effect symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" effect symbol display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number, and the symbol is displayed. When the effect symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the effect symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed subsequently.

Hold storage display areas 5D are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the effect display device 5. In the hold storage display area 5D, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done. In this embodiment, the hold memory display generated based on the start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first starting winning opening is displayed as a round white display, and the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening (entering). The hold memory display generated based on the start winning by entering) is similarly made into a round white display.

In the following description, the hold storage display area 5D may be referred to as a hold display area, and the number of hold storages can be recognized by the number of hold storage displays displayed in the hold storage display area 5D. Further, the display in which the hold storage displays are collected may be referred to as a hold display.

The hold display in the hold memory display area 5D is generated based on the start prize caused by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, or the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. ) May be different in the display mode (for example, display color and shape) depending on whether it is generated based on the start winning prize. In this embodiment, "execution" and "execution" are synonymous.

In the example shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the hold storage display area, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special symbol hold storages on the upper and lower parts of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure reservation number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reservation number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The number of reserved storages in the variable display obtained by adding the number of reserved storages in the first special figure and the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is particularly referred to as the total number of reserved storages. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, some of them (for example, the number of reserved memory). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memory of the first special figure and the number of stored memory of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories).

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. In the case of performing the effect using the effect display device 5 in this way, for example, the effect symbol In recent years, the production modes have been diversified, such as the production in which the production content including the variable display disappears from the screen for a moment, and the production in which a movable object shields all or part of the screen. ing. Therefore, even when looking at the display area on the effect display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, for the purpose of solving the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the state is currently in the variable display, the effect display device 5 displays the fourth symbol next to the effect symbol, the special symbol, and the normal symbol. 4 A symbol display area may be provided. These 4th symbols are displayed in a variable manner for the 1st special symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the 1st special symbol, and are displayed in a variable manner for the 2nd special symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the 2nd special symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol of the above may be performed. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed in a variable manner with a constant operation, and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

A movable accessory 400 is provided above the effect display device 5. The movable accessory 400 has a retracted position above the effect display device 5 and an effect position in front of the effect display device 5 driven by the accessory drive motor 411 (see FIG. 2) connected to the effect control board 12. It is possible to move up and down between.

Below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is provided with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second starting winning opening as a starting area (second starting area).

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, a regulatory member (not shown) advances, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the regulating member (not shown) retracts, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It will be in an expanded and open state that is easy to do. Although the normally variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening even when it is in the normally open state, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter more than when it is in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. In this way, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normally open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" If it is less than 4 ”), the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" If it is less than 4 ”), the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided above the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big winning door as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. I can't do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) Make it easier. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is a first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also referred to as "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game").

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect LEDs 9 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls paid out by renting are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. A plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and an LED control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and a game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the effect display device 5 and the movable accessory 400. , Speakers 8L, 8R and game effect LED9 are equipped with various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components. That is, the effect control board 12 includes the display operation of the effect display device 5, the operation of the movable accessory 400, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all the lighting / extinguishing operations of the game effect LED 9 and the like. Alternatively, it has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the effect to execute a predetermined effect operation, such as a part.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The LED control board 14 is a control board for LED output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is driven to turn on / off in the game effect LED 9 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with an LED driver circuit that performs the above.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. Anything that has it will do. Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the general figure hold display 25C Wiring for transmitting command signals for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is an effect that is variablely displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit" and the variable display result are "big hit". ”, Different EXT data are set according to the decision result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used.

In the variation display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variation display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variation display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit" and the big hit type determination result.

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command that specifies the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game state.

In the jackpot start designation command and the jackpot end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command or the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data correspond to, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "16") in the normal open big hit state and the short-term open big hit state. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , The first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on this, it is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH determines whether the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern becomes the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", "special reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. A variable category command that shows the result.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102) that provides the area, the CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O 105 (Input / Outputport 105).

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the general drawing. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 8, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number values MR1 to MR1. Numerical data indicating a part of MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "non-probability variation" when the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It is a random value, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 5 shows the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode corresponds to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach" and the case where the variation display mode is "reach", and the variation display is also performed. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "big hit" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed, and a super reach β pattern. There is a special reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect is executed but the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern and special reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, As in the case of ..., a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be provided as a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a special reach fluctuation pattern. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than the super reach α and the super reach β, which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. .. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is the one. However, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed. Further, the special reach fluctuation pattern in this embodiment is a fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach β is executed, but the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α and the super reach β, and It is set longer than the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation display result is set to be “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, since the jackpot expectation is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation In the pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of big hit. In this embodiment, as an exception, the special reach fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the super reach β fluctuation pattern has the highest expectation of a big hit.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, special reach type, and the like. Is not determined first, and then the variation patterns to be executed are determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided and these are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the variation pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. .. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, and a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. Table data and the like that make up the fluctuation pattern table are stored.

FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. And the second special figure may use individual display result determination tables.

The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It's a table.

In the display result determination table of this embodiment, the special figure display result is shown according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used as the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data to be assigned. In the display result judgment table of this embodiment, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in this embodiment) (about 1/30 in this embodiment). ). That is, in the display result determination table, there is a probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability variation state (high probability state), it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the jackpot game state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. The table referenced to determine. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variation is displayed (variable) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether the game is a special figure game using the symbol display 4B), the numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are "non-probability variation", "probability variation jackpot A", and "probability variation jackpot B". It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots such as ".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. In this embodiment, high accuracy control and time saving control are executed as the jackpot type after the end of the jackpot game state. Probability change jackpot A and probability variation jackpot B that shift to the probability high base state, and non-probability change jackpot that shifts to the low probability variation base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

In the big hit game state by "probability change big hit A" and the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit", as described above, 16 rounds (so-called) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are performed. 16 rounds), a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B", as described above, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). It is a short-term open jackpot. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 16-round (16R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7 (A), the jackpot of "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" depends on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the type is different. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of "probability variation big hit B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. And when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" and controlled to the short-term open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which a small number of winning balls can be obtained. Can be prevented.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7A, the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of the fact, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. ing.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot B" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the "probability change jackpot A" is used. The assignment of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability variable jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, the variable special figure is the second special figure. Is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". You may. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than when the variable special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the special figure display result are "missing". A variation pattern determination table for deviation, which is used when it is determined in advance to be performed, is prepared in advance.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the fluctuation pattern of the special reach jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value. In this embodiment, when the type of jackpot is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B", the super reach β is easily determined, and the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot". In the case of, the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it does not become “probability change jackpot A” or “probability variation jackpot B”. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table is used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less and the deviation pattern determination table A is used, and when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. A variation pattern determination table B for deviation, a variation pattern determination table C for deviation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8, and a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented. The deviation pattern determination table D used for the above is prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β and the variation pattern (PA2-4) out of reach. ing. Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can be taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern of special reach out of reach (PA2-4). A predetermined random number value in the range is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can be taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), the fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern of special reach out of reach (PA2-4). A predetermined random number value in the range is assigned as a judgment value. Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern out of super reach β (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern out of special reach (PA2-4), a predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 5, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the variation pattern (PA1). The fluctuation time of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the time for the variable display becomes long, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the game state, that is, the data corresponding to the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a special figure holding storage unit 151A, a normal drawing holding storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, and a game control counter setting unit. It includes 154 and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

The special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing is not yet started. A game ball passes (enters) through a game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A) or a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting prize (starting prize). The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B) that has occurred but has not been started yet (the second start winning prize) is stored. As an example, the special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the starting winning opening with the holding number in the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball), and numerical data indicating the starting opening buffer value according to the winning starting winning opening, and the numerical data thereof. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination Until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4 for the 1st special figure holding memory and 4 for the 2nd special figure holding storage, totaling 8), using numerical data indicating the random value MR3 as reserved data. Remember. The hold data stored in the special figure hold storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game is suspended, and whether or not it becomes a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. It is a hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not.

In this embodiment, a mode in which the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage are stored in the same special figure holding storage unit 151A is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage may be stored in individual special figure reservation storage units. In this way, when the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage are stored in the individual special figure holding storage units, the variable display based on the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage are used. One of the variation display based on the above may be executed with priority given to the other, or the variation display based on the first special figure holding memory and the variation display based on the second special figure holding memory may be executed at the same time.

The normal figure hold storage unit 151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. It is configured to include an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. The circuit 124 and the I / O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in the one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5, and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating LED data is connected to the LED control board 14.

On the side of the effect control board 12, as in the main board 11, for example, a random number value (also referred to as an effect random number) for determining the type of various effects such as a notice effect is set.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. There is.

As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect operation by various effect devices (for example, an effect display device 5, a movable accessory 400, speakers 8L, 8R, a game effect LED 9, a decorative LED, an effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table that stores a plurality of types of effect control patterns used for control is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

The effect control pattern at the time of special symbol fluctuation corresponds to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and is in the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the definite special symbol which is the special symbol display result. , It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation of the effect symbol, the reach effect, the effect display operation in the re-lottery effect, or various effect display operations without the variation display of the effect symbol. Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice patterns in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The special figure variation time effect control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach effect.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 9A, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 9A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 9B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The reception command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning is a storage area (buffer numbers "1" to "" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "8") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage and the second special figure reserved storage. An area corresponding to "8") and a storage area corresponding to the special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number "0") are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number “1”) is started. At the same time, the stored contents of the buffer number "0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are cleared in the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the variation display is finished. ing.

Further, whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect (countdown effect or chance eye effect) is determined in the pre-reading advance notice effect determination process (FIG. 20) described later in the start winning command buffer 194A of this embodiment and pre-reading. A storage area for a countdown effect target flag and a chance eye effect target flag indicating the effect type when the target of the advance notice effect is determined is secured for each storage area (entry).

In this embodiment, in the pre-reading advance notice effect determination process described later, if the target of the countdown effect is not determined, "0" is stored in the countdown effect target flag, and if the target is determined to be the countdown effect, the countdown is performed. "1" is stored in the effect target flag. Further, in the pre-reading advance notice effect determination process described later, if the target of the chance eye effect is not determined, "0" is stored in the chance eye effect target flag, and the target of the chance eye effect is determined and the effect type is the first. When the first chance production is decided, "1" is stored in the chance eye production target flag, and when the target of the chance eye production is decided and the production type is decided to be the second chance production, the chance eye is decided. "2" is stored in the production target flag.

At the time of starting winning, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) in the empty entry of the receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end "1" to "8" of the buffer number. It will be stored in order.

The command stored in the start winning command receive command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 9B is an entry (buffer number "buffer number") corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the effect symbol was started. The one stored in the entry of "0") is deleted, and the one stored in the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1") and the start are made. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display are shifted. For example, when the variable display ends in the storage state shown in FIG. 9B, each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted, and each command stored in the buffer number “1” is buffered. While shifting to the number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1", and the buffer numbers "3" and "4" , "5", "6", "7", "8", each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers "2", "3", "4", "5", The area is shifted to the area corresponding to "6" and "7". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, such that a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display 20 is based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, the previous normal symbol game is completed after the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. The game of pachinko is started.

In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time, elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". Become. In response to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, after the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game by the second special symbol display 4B is started.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, when the fluctuation display time as the special symbol fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed. The final confirmed special symbol (special symbol display result) that is the result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, " It will be "off". In addition, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) as a result of these predetermined display results is stopped and displayed. , The small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state may be controlled.

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also referred to as a "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as an off symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the jackpot symbol or the missed symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 4B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the predetermined upper limit time. The large winning opening is opened during the period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The large winning opening door that opens the large winning opening during the execution of the round catches the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby causing a special variable winning ball device. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "16"). Even before the number of rounds to be executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has not won a prize in the large winning opening). ..

Of the rounds in the jackpot game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are the jackpot symbols, the special symbol indicating the number "7" is the jackpot symbol corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot A described later, and the "5" The special symbol indicating the number is a jackpot symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B described later. In the jackpot game state (normally open jackpot state), which is controlled after the jackpot symbol of "3" or "7" is derived as the finalized special symbol in the special symbol game, the jackpot door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened. , Special variable winning by opening the large winning opening during the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or the period until the predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls is generated. The first round (for example, 16 times) of changing the ball device 7 to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is repeatedly executed. The normally open jackpot state is also referred to as the first specific game state.

Of the special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are the jackpot symbols, the special symbol indicating the number "3" is a jackpot symbol corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, which will be described later, and is specially variable. The large winning opening door of the winning ball device 7 opens the large winning opening during the period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By setting the open state, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is repeatedly executed the first time (for example, 16 times) as in the probability change jackpot A. ..

As a definite special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled after the special symbol indicating the number "5" is derived from the special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" which are the jackpot symbols. In the jackpot game state (short-term open jackpot state), the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in each round (the period during which the jackpot is opened by the jackpot door). The upper limit) is the same as the predetermined period in the normal open jackpot state, but the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) that is advantageous to the player is the first number of times in the normal open jackpot state (upper limit). For example, it is repeatedly executed a second time (for example, 5 times) less than 16 times). The short-term open jackpot state is also referred to as the second specific game state. In these short-term open jackpot states, the number of rounds is set to 5 which is the second number, but the number of rounds is the same as the first number (for example, 16 times) in the normal open jackpot state. On the other hand, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous for the player in each round after a predetermined number (for example, 6) (the upper limit of the period for which the big winning opening is opened by the large winning opening door). ) May be set to a second period (for example, 0.1 seconds) shorter than the first period in the normally open jackpot state, so that the actual number of rounds may be made smaller than in the normally open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open jackpot state, the number of rounds is smaller than that in the normal open jackpot state, so that the jackpot state in which the expected value of the balls (prize balls) that can be obtained is smaller than that in the normal open jackpot state is sufficient. In these short-term open jackpot states, by setting the opening period of the big winning opening to the second period (0.1 seconds, etc.) for all rounds, it is practically impossible to obtain a ball (prize ball). It may be in a big hit game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period for changing the big prize opening to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is different from the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The number of rounds executed is at least one of the short second period and the number of second rounds, which is less than the number of first rounds in the normal open round specific game state. It suffices if the number of balls (prize balls) that can be obtained is smaller than that in the jackpot state.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A , Of the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B, the variable display of the effect symbol is started corresponding to the start of any special symbol game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the final effect symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the variable display state of the effect symbol may become a predetermined reach state.

Here, the reach state is an effect symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) are preliminarily used. When the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating alphanumeric characters of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining effect symbol display area (for example, "medium" effect) that has not yet been stopped is displayed. In the symbol display area 5C, etc.), the effect symbol is fluctuating, or the effect symbol is a big hit in all or part of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while forming all or part of the combination.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the effect symbol, or changing the variation mode of the effect symbol, a different effect operation than before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a character image display, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the effect symbol is called a reach effect display (or simply a reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the effect display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) on the light emitting body such as the game effect LED 9, and the like are performed before the reach state is reached. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode of the above.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, in each reach mode, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

As an example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, and special reach are preset. Then, when the reach mode of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and special reach appears, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” as compared with the case where the reach mode of normal reach appears (big hit). Expectation) will be higher. Further, in the present embodiment, in the reach modes of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and special reach, when the super reach β appears, the variable display result is different from the case where the super reach α appears. The expectation of a big hit that becomes a "big hit" is high, and when a special reach appears, the expectation of a big hit that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than when the super reach β appears (big hit expectation: special reach> Super Reach β> Super Reach α> Normal Reach).

In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the reach, the fluctuation time is set to be super reach β> super reach α> normal reach except for the special reach (see FIG. 5), and the fluctuation time is long. Indeed, the expectation for big hits is getting higher.

During the variable display of the effect symbol, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the effect symbol may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variation display mode of the effect symbol, a variation display effect such as "sliding" or "pseudo-ream" for notifying the player may be executed. It suffices to decide whether or not to execute the variation display effect of the “slip” and the “pseudo-ream” in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 11 side. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the variation display effect of "slip" is executed on the effect control board 12 side regardless of the variation pattern determined on the side of the main board 11.

During the variable display of the effect symbol, unlike the variable display effect such as the reach effect, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying a message image, outputting a voice, lighting an LED, etc. Due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation, the variable display state of the effect symbol may be in the reach state, the reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is "big hit". In some cases, a notice effect for notifying the player in advance of the possibility of such a situation may be executed. The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display state of the effect symbol after the variable display of the effect symbol is started in all of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the effect symbol reaches the reach state (before the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variation display result may be a "big hit" may include one that is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state.

When the special symbol that is the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally off”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “off”.

When the special symbol that is the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed, the final effect symbol which is a predetermined reach-out combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variation display result is "out of reach".

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are the jackpot symbols, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Then, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the definite effect symbol which is the predetermined normal jackpot combination (also referred to as “non-probability variation jackpot combination”) among the plurality of types of jackpot combinations is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the non-probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a finalized effect symbol without executing the reach effect.

The finalized effect symbols that are usually the jackpot combination (non-probability variable jackpot combination) are variablely displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 5, for example. Among the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are "1" to "8", any one of the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" is "left", "" It suffices that the production symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "middle" and "right" are aligned on a predetermined effective line and stopped and displayed. The effect symbols whose symbol numbers constituting the normal jackpot combination are even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are called ordinary symbols (also referred to as "non-probability variation symbols").

In response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a normal jackpot symbol, the confirmed effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination (non-probability variable jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "non-probability variation" (also referred to as "normal big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". It should be noted that the normal jackpot combination (non-probability variation jackpot combination) may be stopped and displayed as the finalized effect symbol without executing the reach effect. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-probability change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after the end, the time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving control, as will be described later, the so-called electric chew support is implemented in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is increased. Here, the normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control as (the state in which the initialization process is executed) is performed. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state and that the variable display result becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are the jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the effect symbol is the reach state. In response to this, after the same reach effect as when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "normal" is executed, the final effect symbol becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations. May be displayed as stopped. It should be noted that the probabilistic jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a finalized effect symbol without executing the reach effect. The definite effect symbol that is a probabilistic jackpot combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variablely displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 5 is "1". ~ Of the "8" effect symbols, the effect symbol whose symbol number is "7" is a predetermined valid line in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It suffices as long as it is aligned on the top and stopped. The effect symbol whose symbol number constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is "7" is called a probability variation symbol. When the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed effect symbol, which is usually a jackpot combination, may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the effect symbol.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are the short-term open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the effect symbol is displayed. In response to the reach state, after the same reach effect as in the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "normal" is executed, a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is obtained among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations. The finalized effect symbol may be stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the probabilistic jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a finalized effect symbol without executing the reach effect. As for the finalized effect symbol that is the probability variation jackpot combination, for example, the symbol number that is variablely displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 is “1”. ~ Of the production symbols of "8", any one of the production symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers "1", "3", and "5" other than "7" is "left", "middle", and "right". In each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the stop display may be aligned on a predetermined effective line. The effect symbols whose symbol numbers constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are "1", "3", and "5" are referred to as probability variation symbols as in the above-mentioned effect symbol of "7". In addition, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed effect symbol which is usually a jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as the variable display result of the effect symbol. Good.

Regardless of whether the finalized production symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probabilistic jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special symbol game has a variable display result of "big hit". It is also referred to as a "probability variation" variation display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") in the case. In this embodiment, among the jackpot types of "probability change", the normal open jackpot state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result of "7" is "big hit" as the confirmed special symbol, and the end of the jackpot. Later, probability fluctuation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control. On the other hand, among the jackpot types of "probability change", based on the fact that the variable display result of "5" is "big hit" as a definite special symbol, it is controlled to the short-term open jackpot state, and after that, the time reduction control At the same time, probability fluctuation control (probability variation control) is performed.

By performing these probabilistic change controls, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be terminated when the condition that the variation display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit game state and the control is performed again in the big hit game state is satisfied. As with the time reduction control, the probability variation control is terminated when a predetermined number of special figure games (for example, 100 times, which is the same as the time reduction number, or 90 times, which is different from the time reduction number) are executed after the end of the jackpot game state. You may. In addition, even if the probability change control is terminated when the "probability change fall" decision to end the probability change control is made in the probability change fall lottery executed every time the special figure game is started after the end of the jackpot game state. Good.

When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal", and control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per normal". The second is to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to be longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control (electric chew support control) that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the starting condition is satisfied. As described above, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which time saving control and high opening control are performed together with probability variation control is also called a high probability high base state. Although not set as the game state to be controlled in this embodiment, the probability change state in which only the probability change control is performed and the time saving control and the high opening control are not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. Further, only the gaming state in which the time reduction control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability change control is sometimes referred to as a "probability change state", and in order to distinguish it from the high probability low base state, it may be referred to as a time reduction probability change state. On the other hand, the probability variation state (high accuracy low base state) in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control or the high opening control is not performed may be a probability variation state without time reduction in order to distinguish it from the high accuracy high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without the probability change control is also called the low probability high base state. The normal state in which the probability change control, the time reduction control, and the high opening control are not performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the probability that the special figure game can be executed frequently and that the variation display result in each special figure game becomes a "big hit". Is increased, which is advantageous for the player. A gaming state that is advantageous for a player different from the jackpot gaming state is also called a special gaming state.

A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the effect symbol in which the final effect symbol is a non-probability change jackpot combination or a probability change jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after temporarily stopping and displaying the effect symbols that are usually a big hit combination in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 5, for example, "left". , "Middle", and "Right" in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same effect symbol is changed again in the same state, and the effect symbol (probability variation symbol) that becomes a probability variation jackpot combination and the normal jackpot One of the effect symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is displayed as a stop display (final stop display) as a final effect symbol. Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", as the re-lottery effect, the final effect symbol that becomes a normal jackpot combination after the effect symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is re-variated. It suffices to perform a re-lottery defeat effect that derives and displays. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "probability change", as the re-lottery effect, a definite effect that becomes a probability change jackpot combination after the effect symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is re-variated. The re-lottery winning effect of stopping and displaying the symbol may be executed, or the re-lottery losing effect may be executed.

After the definite effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination (non-probability variation jackpot combination) is derived and displayed, one of the rounds is completed at the start of the jackpot game state, during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state, and in the jackpot game state. Probability change of whether to control to the probability change state in the period from the start of the next round to the start of the next variable display game in the jackpot game state from the end of the last round to the start of the next variable display game. A jackpot promotion effect that serves as a notification effect may be executed. It should be noted that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot game state. The big hit middle promotion effect that is executed after the final round is completed in the big hit game state is sometimes called "ending promotion effect" in particular.

The jackpot medium promotion production includes a jackpot medium promotion success production that notifies that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probable change state even though the final production symbol is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state. There is a promotion failure production during the big hit to notify. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect symbol is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the effect symbol is variablely displayed. It is sufficient to notify the player of the presence or absence of promotion in a probable change state by displaying a different effect image or the like so that the player can recognize it.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (S11). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer arranged outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the display 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and is movable in the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It enables the tilting motion setting of the wing piece.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S17). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By turning it off after the state is set, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S15 shown in FIG. 10 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning process (S21). After executing the start winning process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes S22 to S29 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

In the start winning process of S21, as shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first receives a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (S101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (S101; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is set to a predetermined upper limit value (S101; For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is “4”) (S102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in S102 (S102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (S103). ..

When the first start port switch 22A is off in S101 (S101; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in S102 (S102; Y), a normally variable winning ball device Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (S104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (S104; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the second special figure is set to a predetermined upper limit value (S104; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is “4”) (S105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in S105 (S105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (S106). ..

After executing any of the processes of S103 and S106, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, is updated so as to be added by 1. S108)

After executing the process of S108, the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (S109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit together with the start port buffer value (S110).

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the effect symbol. By executing the process of S109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of S110, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (S111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 10 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the process of S111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (S112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (S113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 10 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of S113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (S114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in S114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S115), and then the process proceeds to S104. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in S114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S112 of FIG. 12 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the effect symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to "" by the special symbol normal processing (S22, FIG. 14 of FIG. 11) described later. As a "big hit", it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S23, FIG. 15 in FIG. 11), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variation display mode of the effect symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the effect symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, it is determined before the variable display of the special symbol or the effect symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, that is, whether or not a big hit is made at the start of the variable display. Before, it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "big hit" and which category of the variation display mode of the effect symbol is, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, the hold display notice effect will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like, for example, to confirm the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The current gaming state in (S121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the process of S121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 6 is selected and set (S122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in S109 of FIG. 12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (S123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of S122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “big hit”.

When it is determined in S123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot does not occur at the time of variable display (S123; N), the symbol corresponding to the variation display result being "missing" The transmission setting of the designated command is executed (S124), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S125). If the time reduction flag is not set (S125; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time reduction flag is set (S125; Y), the deviation pattern determination table is selected. Select and set D (S127).

The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this embodiment, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 is used. B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 14, these deviation pattern determination tables A to A to 8 are prepared. Of C, in the deviation pattern determination table A, a value from 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take, and the deviation variation. In the pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, values B to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in S126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since it is a fluctuation pattern, it is determined by using the deviation pattern determination table A for the determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 13 (A), when it is determined in S123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot at the time of variable display (S123; Y), the jackpot type is determined. The jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 (S128). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in S128 is executed (S129), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern to any of a plurality of them. Set (S130).

After executing any of the processes of S126, S127, and S130, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the processes of S126, S127, and S130 and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are used. The variation category according to the range of the determination values including the random value MR3 is determined (S131). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), when at least the variation display result is “out of”, the variation category is a “non-reach” variation display mode in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. , A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "special reach", and a variable display mode other than these "non-reach", "super reach", and "special reach". It suffices if an "other" variable category that becomes (for example, normal reach) is provided, and it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of S131 to the effect control board 12 (S132), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is completed.

The special symbol normal processing of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether to start the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 151A. Whether or not it is determined is made. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the variation display result determines whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is a "big hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Derivation Determined (predetermined) before being displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol or the big hit symbol) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B corresponds to the variation display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Any of the outliers) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are performed using numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the fluctuation display result is a "big hit". It includes processing to determine the data. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

By the special symbol normal processing of S22 and the variation pattern setting process of S23, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the finalized special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which is the variation display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and use the special symbol and the effect symbol. Includes processing to determine the variation display mode of.

The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. For example, each time the special symbol variation processing of S24 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or added by 1, and the first Regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure on the special symbol display 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B, it is elapsed by a common timer. Time is measured. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation processing of S24 includes the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A, and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B. It suffices if the processing is such that the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using is controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of S25 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the confirmed special symbol that is the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derivated). It includes a process to make settings to make it. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, and if the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Will be done. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening is performed. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period for keeping the big prize opening open is set according to whether the big hit type is "non-probable big hit", "probable change big hit A", or "probable change big hit B". You may. As an example, regardless of the jackpot type, the upper limit of the period for opening the jackpot is set to "29 seconds", and the number of times the jackpot is opened, which is the maximum number of rounds to be executed, is set to "non-probability variable jackpot". "Or" Probability change jackpot A ", it may be set to" 16 times "to set the normal open jackpot state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the number of times the jackpot is opened, which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed, is set to "5", so that the short-term open jackpot state is set. You just have to be. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in S27 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. ..

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening of the big hit, the process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening. In some cases, it includes processing to make settings for sending a jackpot end specification command. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum number of large winning opening openings, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum number of large winning opening openings is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by the effect device such as the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect LED9. It includes a process of waiting until the elapse of, and a process of performing various settings (a set of a probability change flag and a time reduction flag) for starting probability change control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

In the jackpot end process, the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read out, and the jackpot type is any of "non-probability change jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", and "probability variation jackpot B". Identify if it was there. Then, when it is determined that the specified jackpot type is not "non-probability variation jackpot", a setting (set of probability variation flag) for starting probability variation control is performed.

In addition, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the setting for starting the time reduction control (the set of the time reduction flag and the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed during the time reduction control are supported in advance. The predetermined count initial value (“100” in this embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter).

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S22 of FIG. 11 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total number of pending storages is “0” (S141). For example, in the process of S141, the value of the total reserved storage number counter stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the total number of reserved special figures is other than "0" in S141 (S141; N), the special figure is stored as the reserved data corresponding to the reserved number "1" in the special figure reserved storage unit 151A. Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (S142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of S142, the value of the total number of reserved storage counters is subtracted by 1 and updated, and the data of the special figure reserved storage unit 151A is updated. Specifically, the hold indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "8") in the special figure hold storage unit 151A. The data is shifted upward one entry at a time (S143).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port buffer of the hold number "1" read in S143 is "1" (S144). When the value of the start port buffer of the hold number "1" read in S143 is "1" (S144; Y), the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" indicating that the value of the first special figure is variable. (S145), and when the value of the start port buffer of the hold number “1” read in S143 is “2” (S144; N), the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is set to the value of the second special figure. Set "2" to indicate fluctuation (S146)

After the execution of S145 or S146, in S149, the display shown in FIG. 6 is used as a table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select and set the result judgment table. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (S150). In this S150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state in which the probability change flag is set, and if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1000 to 12180, then a "big hit". , And if not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state in which the probability change flag is not set, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as a "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". Is determined.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table selected in S149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, and therefore S150. In the process of, the special figure display result is "big hit" using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a high probability state. When the game state is in the high probability state, it is determined to be a "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

After determining the special figure display result in S150, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" (S151). Then, when it is determined to be a "big hit" (S151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state (S152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7A is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (S153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer and the "non-probability change" and "probability variation A" in the jackpot type determination table. , It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "probability variation B" is matched (S154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of S154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S155), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" corresponding to the non-probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probability variation A" corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1", and the probability variation jackpot B If it is "probability variation B" corresponding to, it may be set to "2".

On the other hand, if it is determined in S151 that it is not a "big hit" (S151; N), the process proceeds to S156.

In S156, it is determined in advance of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set), and further, according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. Set a special symbol. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" in S151, the big hit symbols "3", "5", and "7" are set according to the determination result of the big hit type in S154. One of the special symbols indicating the numbers is set as the finalized special symbol. That is, a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". In addition, a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "probability variation A". A special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "probability variation B".

After the finalized special symbol is set in S156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (S157), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated.

If the total number of reserved storages is "0" in S141 (S141; Y), the special symbol normal processing is terminated after the predetermined demo display setting is made (S158). In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S23 of FIG. 11 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (S161). Then, if the jackpot flag is on (S161; Y), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the fluctuation pattern to any of a plurality of types (S162).

When the jackpot flag is off in S161 (S161; N), for example, by determining whether or not the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on (whether or not it is set), the game is played. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed when the time saving control is performed in the probability changing state or the time saving state (S163). Then, if the time saving flag is on (S163; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (S164).

On the other hand, when the time saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time saving flag is off (when it is not set) (S163; N), for example, the total number of reserved memory counters provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. The total number of reserved storages is specified by reading the stored value or the like, and it is determined whether or not the specified total number of reserved storages is 2 or more (S165).

When the specified total number of reserved storages is not 2 or more (S165; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types (S165; N). S166).

Further, when the specified total number of reserved storages is 2 or more (S165; Y), the process proceeds to S167 to further determine whether or not the total number of reserved storages is 5 or more (S167).

When the total number of reserved storages is not 5 or more (S167; N), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (S168). ..

When the total number of reserved storages is 5 or more (S167; Y), the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set as the table used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types. (S169).

After executing any of the processes of S162, S164, S166, S168, and S169, the data is selected based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation. By referring to either the jackpot variation pattern determination table or the loss variation pattern determination table A to D, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S170).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variation pattern is determined in the process of S170 to determine whether or not the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "reach". That is, the process of S170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the effect symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is "off".

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in S170, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. (2) A setting is made to start the fluctuation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special symbol games using the special symbol (S171). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B.

Following the process of S171, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (S172). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a fluctuation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is set in the game control buffer setting unit 155. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a fluctuation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the second hold storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the command buffer area.

After executing the process of S172, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (S173). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variation display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variation display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (S174), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in S172, every time the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 10 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. , The first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation display result designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, or the second hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variation display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, and the variation pattern specification command can be changed. , The game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, and the like may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S25 of FIG. 11 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of S24 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. Control is performed to derive and display a symbol (S181). When the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is terminated, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (S182). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (S183), and if the jackpot flag is not set (S183; N), the process proceeds to S190.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (S183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (S184) if the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set, and the effect control board 12 is set. , Make settings to send the jackpot start 1 designation command (probability change A), jackpot start 2 designation command (probability change B), and jackpot start 3 designation command (non-probability change) according to the stored jackpot type (S185). ).

Further, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (S186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the effect display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (S187). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 16 times in the case of non-probability change big hit or probability change big hit A and 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (S188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (S26) (S189).

On the other hand, in S190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (S190; Y), the process proceeds to S196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is set to -1 (S191). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (S193), and if it is not "0" (S193; N), the process proceeds to S196, and the value of the time reduction counter is "0". In the case of (S193; Y), after clearing the time saving flag (S194) in order to end the time saving control, a gaming state (specifically, low probability) corresponding to the setting state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is set. After setting the transmission of the game state specification command corresponding to (low base) (S195), the process proceeds to S196.

In S196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S29 of FIG. 11 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (S201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (S201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the effect display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. Set (S204) and end the process.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (S201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (S205). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S206). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S206; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (S207).

When the jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (S207; Y), the probability variation flag is set (S208), the time reduction flag is set (S209), and "0" is set in the time reduction counter. (S210), the process proceeds to S213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (S207; N), by executing S211 and S212, the time reduction flag is set and the time reduction counter is set to "100", and then S213. Proceed to.

In S213, the jackpot flag is cleared, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (S214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the time reduction flag (S215), the value of the special figure process flag is processed in the special symbol normal process. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to (S216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control is performed (S51). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

Next, an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an effect control process process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the effect type of the look-ahead notice effect (S71), and then the effect display device 5 The hold display update process for updating the hold storage display in the hold storage display area 5D to the display corresponding to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 194A is executed (S72).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs any of the processes S73 to S79 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern specification command is received in the command analysis process. If the variation pattern specification command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S74).

Effect symbol variation start process (S74): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75).

Processing during effect symbol change (S75): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S76): Control to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol) based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols. Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S77) or the variation pattern designation command reception wait process (S73).

Big hit display process (S77): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game in-game process (S78).

Process during big hit game (S78): Control during big hit game. For example, when a designated command during the opening of the large winning opening or a designated command after opening the large winning opening is received, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S79).

Big hit end effect processing (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S71 of FIG. 19 as the pre-reading advance notice effect determination process. In the pre-reading advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 194A (S241), and counts down whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. It is determined based on whether or not there is an entry in which the advance notice effect target flag and the chance eye advance notice effect target flag are not set (S242).

If there is no entry in which the countdown advance notice effect target flag and the chance eye advance notice effect target flag are not set (S242; N), the pre-reading advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and the countdown advance notice effect target flag and the chance eye advance notice effect target flag are not set. If there is an entry in which and is not set (S242; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an entry in which the first symbol designation command indicating that the jackpot is held and stored is stored before the entry (S242; Y). S243). If there is an entry in which the first symbol designation command is stored before the entry (S243; Y), the process proceeds to S248, and if there is no entry in which the first symbol designation command is stored (S243; N), the entry is performed. It is determined whether or not all the variable category specification commands stored in the entries before the entry are non-reach variable category specification commands (S244).

If all the variable category specification commands stored in the entries before the entry are not non-reach variable category specification commands (S244; N), the process proceeds to S248, and the variable category specification commands stored in the entries before the entry are displayed. In the case of all non-reach variable category specification commands (S224; Y), numerical data indicating a random number value for pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random number of the effect control counter setting unit 193 and the entry thereof. By referring to a look-ahead notice effect determination table (not shown) based on the variation category of (S245), whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the effect type are determined (S245).

In S245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the effect type are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 21, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the determination rate of the effect type are different depending on the variation category of the entry.

Specifically, as the effect type of the look-ahead notice effect, the first chance advance notice effect in which the effect symbols are derived and displayed in an even number combination such as "224" or "446" in the change display before the change display of the look-ahead target. And, in the variation display before the change display of the look-ahead target, the second chance notice effect in which the effect symbol is derived and displayed by an odd number combination such as "113" and "335", and the change display before the change display of the look-ahead target There are three types: a countdown notice effect that executes a countdown at each start. In the present embodiment, the chance eye advance notice effect is illustrated as the first specific effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific effect is intended for any variable display. In the case of a look-ahead advance notice effect that is executed over a plurality of continuous variable displays without clearly notifying the player, for example, a background image may be produced over a plurality of continuous variable displays. There may be. Further, in the present embodiment, the countdown advance notice effect is illustrated as the second specific effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second specific effect is intended for any variable display. It suffices as long as it is a look-ahead notice effect that clearly notifies the player of the situation and executes it over a plurality of continuous variable displays.

Then, as shown in FIG. 21, when the variable category of the entry is "non-reach", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 100%, and the variable category of the entry is "other". Determines the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect at a rate of 80%, determines the execution of the first chance notice effect at a rate of 15%, and determines the execution of the second chance notice effect at a rate of 5%. .. If the variable category of the entry is "Super Reach", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 70%, the execution of the first chance advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the first The execution of the second chance notice production is decided at a rate of 20%. Then, when the variable category of the entry is "special reach", the non-execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the execution of the second chance advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and the countdown is performed. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 50%.

When the execution of the countdown notice effect is decided by such a setting, the variable display of the look-ahead target is special at a higher rate than when the execution of the first chance notice effect and the second chance notice effect is decided. It is designed to be executed in the reach fluctuation pattern. Further, when the execution of the second chance advance notice effect is decided, the variation display of the look-ahead target is executed in the special reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the execution of the first chance advance notice effect is decided. It has become like. Then, when the execution of the first chance advance notice effect is decided, the variation display of the look-ahead target is executed in the special reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the non-execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is decided. It has become.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided, the variation display of the look-ahead target is executed in the special reach variation pattern as compared with the case where the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided. In addition to this, the rate at which the change display of the look-ahead target is executed in the special reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the production type of the look-ahead notice effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by attracting the player to the production type of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed.

In this embodiment, three types of pre-reading notice effects are provided: a first chance notice effect, a second chance notice effect, and a countdown advance notice effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The effect type of the look-ahead notice effect may be two or less types or four or more types.

Further, in this embodiment, when executing the look-ahead notice effect, only one of the first chance notice effect, the second chance notice effect, and the countdown notice effect is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the execution of two or more types of pre-reading notice effects such as the first chance notice effect and the countdown notice effect, the second chance notice effect and the countdown notice effect, etc. is duplicated. May be decided.

Further, in this embodiment, as a chance eye notice effect, a mode in which a combination of effect symbols indicating an outlier is derived and displayed by an even number combination such as "224" or an odd number combination such as "113" is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a chance eye notice effect, a combination of effect symbols indicating an outlier may be derived and displayed by an even number combination or an odd number combination.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mode suggesting that the variation display is executed in the special reach variation pattern by executing the look-ahead notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the look-ahead notice effect may suggest that the variation display result is a big hit, in addition to suggesting that the variation display is executed in the special reach variation pattern.

After the execution of S245, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the countdown advance notice effect is determined in S245 (S246). When the execution of the countdown notice effect is decided in S245 (S246; Y), "1" indicating that the countdown notice effect target flag of the entry is decided to be executed, the chance eye notice of the entry. The pre-reading advance notice effect determination process is terminated by setting each of the effect target flags to "0" indicating that the non-execution of the chance eye advance notice effect has been decided (S249, S250).

If the execution of the countdown notice effect is not decided in S245 (S246; N), it is determined in S245 whether or not the execution of the first chance notice effect or the second chance notice effect is decided (S247). ). If it is decided in S245 that the first chance first notice effect or the second chance notice effect is not executed (S247; N), the process proceeds to S248, and in S245, the first chance first notice effect or the second chance notice effect is performed. When the execution was decided (S247; Y), "0" indicating that the countdown notice effect was decided not to be executed was set in the countdown notice effect target flag of the entry (S251), and the execution was decided in S245. It is determined whether or not it is the first chance notice production (S252).

If it is the first chance notice effect that is decided to be executed in S245 (S252; Y), the flag indicating the chance eye notice effect of the entry indicates that the execution of the first chance notice effect is decided. Is set to end the look-ahead notice effect determination process (S253), and if it is the second chance advance notice effect that is decided to be executed in S245 (S252; N), the chance eye advance notice effect target flag of the entry is set. Is set to "2" indicating that the execution of the second chance notice effect is decided, and the look-ahead notice effect determination process is completed (S254).

In S248, the countdown advance notice effect target flag and the chance eye advance notice effect target flag of the entry are set to "0", respectively, and the look-ahead advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S74) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation start command reception flag is set in S271 (S271). If the variation start command reception flag is not set (S271; N), the effect symbol variation start process is terminated, and if the variation start command reception flag is set (S271; Y), the start winning command is received. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special figure hold storage in the buffer 194A are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After the execution of S272, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (S273).

Next, refer to the value of the chance eye notice effect target flag stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 194A after the shift, and these chance eyes. It is determined whether or not "1" or "2" is set in any of the values of the advance notice effect target flag, that is, whether or not the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is determined (S274). When "0" is set in the value of all chance eye notice effect target flags (S274; N), the fluctuation pattern specification command read in S273 is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is a jackpot fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not it is (S275).

When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S275; Y), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined from the combination indicating the jackpot according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. Proceed to S283 (S276). As a combination indicating a jackpot, for example, when the jackpot type is "probability variation A", it is determined to be "333" or "777", and when the jackpot type is "probability variation B", "111" or It may be determined to be an odd number combination excluding "333" and "777" such as "555", and if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", it may be determined to be an even number combination such as "222" or "444". ..

Further, in S275, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is an odd fluctuation pattern (S275; N), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is indicated to be out of alignment according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. It is determined from the combination of even numbers and odd numbers (S277). Then, the value of the countdown notice effect target flag stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 194A after the shift is referred to, and these countdown notice effects are produced. It is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the values of the target flag, that is, whether or not the execution of the countdown notice effect is determined (S278).

When "1" is set in any of the values of the countdown notice effect target flag (S278; Y), the countdown notice effect is set to the timer waiting for the start of the countdown notice effect in order to execute the countdown notice effect in the fluctuation display. Set the value according to the period up to the start and proceed to S283 (S279), and if "0" is set to all the values of the countdown notice effect target flag (S278; N), go through S279. Proceed to S283 without proceeding.

Further, in S274, when "1" or "2" is set in the value of any of the chance eye advance notice effect target flags (S274; Y), the value of any of the chance eye advance notice effect target flags is set to "". It is determined whether or not "1" is set (S280). When "1" is set in the value of any of the chance eye advance notice effect target flags (S280; Y), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is set according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area. Decide from an even number of combinations indicating the loss (such as "224" and "446" as the first chance notice effect described above) and proceed to S283 (S281), and set the value of one of the chance eye notice effect target flags to " When "2" is set (S280; N), the stop symbol of the effect symbol is set according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area, and an odd number combination indicating the loss (the second chance described above). It is decided from "113", "335", etc. as a notice production) and proceeds to S283 (S282).

In S283, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the variation pattern designation command read in S273, and determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display is a special reach variation pattern. When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is not a special reach fluctuation pattern (S283; N), the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specification command is selected and the process proceeds to S288 (S284), and the fluctuation of the fluctuation display is changed. When the pattern is a special reach fluctuation pattern (S283; Y), the countdown notice effect target flag stored in association with the buffer number “0” of the special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 194A after the shift. Whether or not the value of the countdown notice effect target flag is set to "1", that is, whether or not the change display is the target change display of the countdown notice effect (pre-reading the change display) It is determined (S285) whether or not the countdown notice effect has been executed up to the immediately preceding fluctuation display as the target.

When the value of the countdown notice effect target flag stored in association with the buffer number "0" is set to "0" (S285; N), the special variation pattern corresponding to the non-execution of the countdown notice effect When the effect control pattern (process table) is selected and the process proceeds to S288 (S286), and the value of the countdown notice effect target flag stored in association with the buffer number "0" is set to "1" (S285). Y) selects an effect control pattern (process table) of a special variation pattern according to the execution of the countdown advance notice effect, and proceeds to S288 (S287).

Then, in S288, the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in any of S284, S286, and S287 is started.

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, operation control execution data for controlling the operation of the movable accessory 400, and LED control for controlling the lighting of each LED are displayed. Execution data, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect device (effect display device 5 as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, operation control execution data, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1). , The movable accessory 400 as the effect component, various LEDs, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) are controlled (S289). For example, the effect display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to operate the movable accessory 400, a drive signal is output to the accessory drive motor 411. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect control design command so that the effect pattern is displayed in a variation pattern corresponding to a one-to-one variation pattern, whereas the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (S290). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S291). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right effect symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The effect symbol changes are realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the effect display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the effect display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75) (S292).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (S75) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer to -1 (S301, S302, S303). Further, the effect control CPU 120 is set with a timer waiting for the start of the countdown advance notice effect (determined to perform the countdown advance notice effect), or is set with the countdown advance notice effect executing flag (countdown advance notice effect). (S304; Y), the countdown notice effect processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S305). If neither the countdown notice effect start waiting timer nor the countdown notice effect execution flag is set, the process proceeds to S306 without executing the notice effect process of S305.

In S306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (S307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (S308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the operation control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc., which are set next (S309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for production) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, operation control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (S309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation control timer is timer-out (S310). When the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (S310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the next display screen of the effect symbol on the left, middle, and right (30 ms after the previous display switching time of the effect symbol). Image data of the screen to be output) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (S311). In this way, the effect display device 5 realizes fluctuation control of the effect symbol. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 5. Output. In this way, the effect display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the variation of the effect symbol. Further, the predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (S312).

Further, when the fluctuation control timer is not timer-out (S310; N), after the execution of S312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer is timer-out (S313). If the fluctuation time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S76) (S315). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing ( The value is updated according to S76) (S315). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timered out, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is used. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the effect symbol can be ended when the regular fluctuation time elapses (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol).

In the process table used for controlling the fluctuation of the effect symbol, the process data during the variation display of the effect symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the effect symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of S306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the effect symbol based on the process table ends. To do.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the countdown notice effect processing. In the countdown advance notice effect process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the countdown advance notice effect execution flag is set, that is, whether or not the countdown advance notice effect is started (S321).

If the countdown advance notice effect execution flag is not set (S321; N), in S322, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the countdown advance notice effect start waiting timer to -1. If the timer for waiting for the start of the countdown notice effect is not out (S323; N), the countdown notice effect process ends. When the timer for waiting for the start of the countdown notice effect is out, that is, when it is the start timing of the countdown notice effect (S323; Y), the process proceeds to S324.

In S324, the effect control CPU 120 sets a countdown advance notice effect executing flag indicating that the countdown advance notice effect is being executed. Further, a value corresponding to the countdown notice effect period corresponding to the countdown notice effect is set in the countdown notice effect period timer (S325).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 reads and sets the countdown advance notice effect process table corresponding to the remaining number of variable display times up to the change display, which is the read-ahead target (S326), and then sets the process data 1 of the selected countdown advance notice effect process table. The countdown notice production process timer is started (S327). In this embodiment, the countdown advance notice effect process table corresponding to the remaining number of variable display times up to the variable display, which is the read-ahead target, is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 has the contents of the first process data 1 of the set advance notice effect process table (display control execution data 1, movable control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution). The countdown notice is executed by controlling the production device (effect display device 5 as a production part, movable accessory 400, game effect LED9 as a production part, and speakers 8L, 8R as a production part) according to (data 1 etc.). The production process is completed (S328).

Further, when the countdown advance notice effect executing flag is set in S321, the process proceeds to S329, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the countdown advance notice effect process timer for changing the process of the countdown advance advance effect to -1. To do. Then, the value of the countdown notice effect period timer for timing the end of the countdown notice effect period is set to -1 (S330). When the countdown notice effect period timer goes out (the value becomes 0) (S331; Y), the countdown notice effect execution flag is cleared and the countdown notice effect process ends (S336).

When the countdown advance notice effect period timer is not timer-out (S331; N), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the countdown advance notice effect process timer has timed out (S332). If the countdown advance notice effect process timer is out, the advance notice effect process data for the countdown advance notice effect is switched (S333). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set value of the advance notice effect process timer in the countdown advance notice effect process table in the process timer (S334). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is based on the display control execution data, the movable control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, etc. included in the countdown notice effect process data set next. Is changed (S335), and the advance notice effect processing is terminated.

In this way, by executing the control of the countdown advance notice effect based on the countdown advance notice effect process table and the countdown advance notice effect process timer, the countdown advance notice effect is started at the start timing in the countdown advance notice effect process table, and the countdown advance notice effect is sequentially started. The control content of the countdown notice effect described in the countdown notice effect process table is executed, so that the countdown notice effect is executed until the period of the countdown notice effect ends.

When the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect symbol change start process, the effect symbol change process, and the countdown advance notice effect process as described above, and the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α, the figure is shown in the figure. As shown in 25 (A), the reach is reached when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and the reach effect of the super reach α is executed for 23 seconds from the time when 10 seconds have passed. When the fluctuation display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach β, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), the reach is reached when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and when another 10 seconds have passed. The reach effect of Super Reach β is executed for 33 seconds.

Furthermore, when the fluctuation display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the special reach, if the countdown notice effect is not executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display (the chance is in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display). (Including the case where the eye notice effect is executed), as shown in FIG. 26 (A), the movable accessory 400 is operated for 5 seconds from the time when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Then, the reach effect of the super reach β is executed for 33 seconds from the time when the operation of the movable accessory is completed. Further, if the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 26B, the movable accessory 400 is operated for 6 seconds from the time when the fluctuation starts. Then, the reach effect of the super reach β is executed for 33 seconds from the time when the operation of the movable accessory is completed.

As shown in FIGS. 26 (A) and 26 (B), in this embodiment, the countdown notice effect is not executed and the countdown notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display. While the operation start timing of the movable accessory 400 is different depending on the case, the timing at which the operation of the movable accessory 400 is completed and the reach effect of the super reach β is started is the same. Therefore, in the case where the countdown notice effect is not executed in the change display immediately before the change display and the case where the countdown notice effect is executed, it is for effect control after the timing when the reach effect of the super reach β is started. The processing of the CPU 120 can be standardized, and the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 accompanying the fluctuation display can be reduced.

Next, the display mode of the effect display device 5 and the operation mode of the movable accessory 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 31. First, as shown in FIGS. 27 (A) to 27 (C), when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, the combination indicating that the effect symbols are out of order. When the variation display in the special reach variation pattern is started after the derivation display is performed in, the movable accessory 400 operates for 5 seconds from 1 second after the start of the variation, as shown in FIG. 27 (D). ..

Specifically, the movable accessory 400 moves from the retracted position above the effect display device 5 to the effect position in front of the effect display device 5. Then, when the movable accessory 400 moves from the effect position toward the evacuation position again and the operation period of the movable accessory 400 for 5 seconds ends, as shown in FIG. 27 (E), the effect display device 5 superimposes. The reach production of reach β is started.

Further, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 28 (A) to 28 (E), the effect is produced as the countdown notice effect. Every time the fluctuation display of the symbol is started, the notification of the remaining number of fluctuations until the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern is executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 29 (F) to 29 (H), when the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern is started, the countdown notice effect is executed in the immediately preceding fluctuation display. At the same time as the start of the variation display, the movable accessory 400 operates for 6 seconds.

Specifically, the movable accessory 400 moves from the retracted position above the effect display device 5 to the effect position in front of the effect display device 5. Then, when the movable accessory 400 moves from the effect position to the evacuation position again and the operation period of the movable accessory 400 for 6 seconds ends, as shown in FIG. 29 (H), the effect display device 5 superimposes. The reach production of reach β is started.

Further, when the chance eye notice effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 30 (A) to 30 (E), the chance eye notice effect is used. , Each time the variable display is executed, the effect symbol is derived and displayed in a combination of "224", "113", and the like. Then, as shown in FIGS. 31 (F) to 31 (H), when the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern is started, the chance eye notice effect is executed in the immediately preceding fluctuation display. Based on this, the movable accessory 400 operates for 5 seconds from 1 second after the start of fluctuation.

Specifically, the movable accessory 400 moves from the retracted position above the effect display device 5 to the effect position in front of the effect display device 5. Then, when the movable accessory 400 moves from the effect position toward the evacuation position again and the operation period of the movable accessory 400 for 5 seconds ends, as shown in FIG. 27 (E), the effect display device 5 superimposes. The reach production of reach β is started.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special reach is performed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach β is executed after the movable accessory 400 is operated. Special reach when the countdown notice effect suggesting that the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern is executed In the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern, the special reach is performed when the countdown notice effect is not executed. By starting the operation of the movable accessory 400, which is executed one second after the start of the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern, from the start of the fluctuation, the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern is performed in the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern. Since the operation of the movable accessory 400 is started at a timing closer to the start timing of the fluctuation display than when the countdown advance notice effect is not executed, the player can determine the relationship between the countdown advance notice effect and the operation of the movable accessory 400. It can be easily recognized by the game and the game entertainment can be improved.

In particular, when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the timing 1 second after the start of the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern. , When the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the start timing of the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern. In addition to making it easier for a person to recognize the relationship between the countdown notice effect and the operation of the movable accessory 400, the case where the countdown notice effect is executed and executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach fluctuation pattern is executed. Since it is possible to easily recognize that the operation start timing of the movable accessory 400 is different from that in the case where it is not performed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this embodiment, if the countdown notice effect is not executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern, the movable combination is started from the timing 1 second after the start of the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern. When the object 400 is operated and the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the start timing of the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special reach variation pattern is used when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. The timing of operating the movable accessory 400 in the variation display may be any timing as long as it is after the start timing of the variation display, and further, the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. If this is the case, the timing to operate the movable accessory 400 in the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern is the special reach when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern. If the timing is before the timing of operating the movable accessory 400 in the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern, for example, 0.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display, the timing is not "simultaneous" with the start of the fluctuation display. Good.

Further, in this embodiment, as a pre-reading advance notice effect for pre-reading that the variation display is executed in the special reach variation pattern, a countdown that gradually suggests the remaining number of variation displays until the variation display of the special reach variation pattern in each variation display. Since the advance notice effect is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the variation display is executed in the special reach variation pattern, so that the game interest can be improved.

In this embodiment, the countdown notice effect is illustrated as an effect that gradually suggests the number of remaining fluctuation display times until the fluctuation display of the special reach fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the countdown notice effect is not limited to this. The effect may be an effect that gradually suggests the real time until the variation display of the special reach variation pattern is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the second specific effect in the present invention, a countdown notice effect that gradually suggests the remaining number of times of variation display until the variation display of the special reach variation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If it is a look-ahead notice effect that allows the player to specify the number of remaining fluctuation display times until the change display of the special reach fluctuation pattern, even if an effect other than the countdown advance notice effect such as a count-up effect is executed Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, as a countdown notice effect, a mode in which the remaining number of fluctuation display times until the fluctuation display of the special reach fluctuation pattern is indicated numerically is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates this. The number of remaining fluctuation display times up to the fluctuation display of the special reach fluctuation pattern is suggested by a mode other than a number (for example, the length of the fuse of the bomb or the amount of sand remaining in the hourglass). May be good.

Further, in this embodiment, as a pre-reading notice effect that pre-reads that the fluctuation display is executed in the special reach fluctuation pattern, it is possible to execute the chance eye notice effect in addition to the countdown notice effect, and the special reach fluctuation pattern. When the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the start timing of the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern, while the fluctuation in the special reach fluctuation pattern. When the chance eye notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the display, the movable accessory 400 is operated from the timing 1 second after the start of the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, that is, the special reach variation. Since the operation start timing of the movable accessory 400 is different depending on whether the look-ahead notice effect executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the pattern is the countdown notice effect or the chance eye notice effect, the game You can improve your interest.

In this embodiment, the operation of the movable accessory 400 depends on whether the look-ahead notice effect executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach fluctuation pattern is the countdown notice effect or the chance eye notice effect. Although the start timing is different, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is a chance that the look-ahead notice effect executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach fluctuation pattern is the countdown notice effect. The operation of the movable accessory 400 may be started from the same timing regardless of whether it is a preview effect.

Further, as the fluctuation pattern of the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern having a higher expectation of big hit than the fluctuation pattern of non-reach or normal reach, as shown in FIG. 25, the movement of the movable accessory 400 is not executed and the fluctuation is displayed. The fluctuation pattern of super reach α and super reach β, in which the reach effect is started 20 seconds after the start, and as shown in FIG. 26, the movement of the movable accessory 400 is executed and the reach effect is started 6 seconds after the start of the variation display. Since the variation pattern of the special reach to be started is provided, the player can pay attention to whether or not the operation of the movable accessory 400 is executed during the variation display, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, the operation of the movable accessory 400 is changed in the special reach in both the case where the countdown notice effect is executed and the case where the countdown notice effect is not executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach change pattern. By ending 6 seconds after the start of the variation display in the pattern (complete the movement of the movable accessory 400 from the effect position to the evacuation position), it is possible to standardize the processing after the operation of the movable accessory 400 is completed, which is special. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 due to the fluctuation display in the reach fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, the special reach fluctuation pattern is used depending on whether the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern or the countdown notice effect is not executed. Although the embodiment in which the subsequent processing is standardized by ending the operation of the movable accessory 400 in the variation display at the same timing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special reach variation pattern is used. The timing at which the operation of the movable accessory 400 is terminated may be different depending on whether the countdown notice effect is executed or the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Is done.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the movable accessory 400 is moved between the retracted position and the effect position is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable accessory 400 is not limited to this, and the movable accessory 400 is activated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. By moving the object 400, it may be confirmed whether or not the movable accessory 400 can operate normally.

In this way, when confirming whether or not the movable accessory 400 can be operated when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the following operations shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 are executed as a modification 1. First, it is determined whether or not the movable accessory 400 is located at the retracted position by a retracted position detection sensor or the like (not shown), and if it is not located at the retracted position of the movable accessory 400, as shown in FIG. 32, an effect is produced. By driving the accessory drive motor 411, the control CPU 120 executes control to move the movable accessory 400 to the retracted position as a non-detection operation. Further, when the movable accessory 400 is located at the retracted position, the effect control CPU 120 drives the accessory drive motor 411 to control the operation at the time of detection by moving the movable accessory 400 between the retracted position and the effect position. After moving to the detection operation position, which is the position of, the movable accessory 400 is moved to the retracted position again.

Further, after executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 actually moves the movable accessory 400 from the retracted position to the effect position, as shown in FIG. 33. Executes the actual operation check operation control to move from the effect position to the evacuation position again.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (C), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 accelerates from the evacuation position and then decelerates and stops at the exercise site position. At the same time, control is performed to accelerate from the exercise position, then decelerate and stop at the evacuation position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that the movable accessory 400 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable accessory 400 is changed from low speed to high speed between the evacuation position and the practice site position. Change in order of low speed.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the detection operation control, the actual operation confirmation operation is always performed during the period of moving the movable accessory 400 from the retracted position to the effect position and the period of moving the movable accessory 400 from the effect position to the retracted position. The movable accessory 400 is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in the control. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the movable accessory 400 always operates at the lowest speed in the operation check operation control during the period of moving the movable accessory 400 to the retracted position. To control.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control, the detection operation control, and the non-detection operation control, respectively, so that the movable accessory 400 always operates when the non-detection operation control is executed. By operating at the lowest speed in the confirmation operation control, it is possible to stop at any timing, so that the movable accessory 400 can be positioned at the retracted position without fear of being damaged by a collision or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display is executed in the special reach variation pattern, the embodiment in which the movable accessory 400 is always operated has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special reach variation is not limited to this. When the variable display is executed by the pattern, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to execute the operation of the movable accessory 400. When deciding whether or not to execute the operation of the movable accessory 400 by lottery, the execution of the operation of the movable accessory 400 is determined at a rate of 100% using the table for determining the operation of the movable accessory 400. You may.

Further, in the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the movable accessory 400 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with a plurality of movable accessories. Good. When a plurality of movable accessories are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, the movable accessories that operate when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern, and The movable accessory that operates when the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern may be different.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation in the special reach fluctuation pattern is changed in the special reach fluctuation pattern. Although a mode in which the movable accessory 400 is operated at a timing prior to the case where the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variable display immediately before the display is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special reach is not limited to this. When the countdown notice effect is executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern, the countdown notice is in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display in the special reach fluctuation pattern. The movable accessory 400 may be operated at a timing later than when the effect is not executed, or the movable accessory 400 may be operated in the variation display before or after the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. You may.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable accessory 400 is set to 1 in both the case where the countdown notice effect is executed and the case where the countdown notice effect is not executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. Although the embodiment in which the operation is performed only once has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special reach variation is performed when the countdown notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. In addition to the timing when the countdown notice effect is not executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in the pattern, the movable accessory 400 may be operated at another timing. Further, as described above, when a plurality of movable accessories are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movable accessories that are operated at the first operation timing and the movable accessories that are operated at the second operation timing are made different. You may.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body in the present invention is exemplified as a movable accessory 400 that moves between the retracted position and the effect position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The movable body may perform an operation such as rotation or vibration at a specific position.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the movable accessory 400 is operated only when the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the special reach has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. , The movable accessory 400 may be operated in a part of the variable display of the super reach α and the super reach β.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the countdown notice effect, which is a look-ahead notice effect, is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in the special reach variation pattern, the movable combination is started from the start timing of the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. Although the embodiment of operating the object 400 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect other than the look-ahead notice effect is executed in the variation display immediately before the variation display in the special reach variation pattern. The movable accessory 400 may be operated from the start timing of the variation display in the special reach variation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the game machine. The number of rented balls lent out in response to the player's request for renting and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored in the game. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control CPU 120 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect, one variation pattern designation command is transmitted when the variation is started. As shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 uses the first command to, for example, set the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode before reaching the reach (or before the so-called second stop in the case of not reaching the reach). The command to be shown is sent, and the second command shows the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached), such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect. A command may be transmitted, or only the fluctuation time is notified by the first command and the second command, and the effect control CPU 120 is used for the specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing. You may make a selection with. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode in which a game ball is launched from below the game area by a ball launching device has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the ball launching device is used as a pachinko gaming machine 1. By providing the game ball at a position above the game area in the above, the game ball may be launched from a position above the game area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which only a jackpot that can acquire a large number of game balls is generated by opening the jackpot in the jackpot game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, for example, the probability variation jackpot B is suddenly caused by the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot B by significantly shortening the opening time of the jackpot in the round game so that the player does not recognize that the jackpot has been opened. It may be a sudden jackpot that makes it look like it is in a probable state. When these probabilistic jackpots B are used as sudden jackpots, a small hit that opens the jackpot with the same opening pattern as the opening pattern of the jackpot in the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot B is provided. It is also possible to generate a state (so-called latent state) in which it is unknown whether the gaming state after the occurrence of the probability variation big hit B or the small hit is the high probability state or the low probability state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the starting winning opening is set to two, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting winning opening is not limited to this. May be only one, or the starting winning opening may be three or more.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the special symbol is set to two, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one special symbol is used. Or, the number of special symbols may be 3 or more.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each changely display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol that is the display result, and then stop and display the final stop symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed after a plurality of types of special symbols are variablely displayed without including the final stop symbol that is the display result. It may be. That is, the final stop symbol that is the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

The advantageous state for the player is a specific game state (big hit, etc.) that is advantageous for the player who can acquire a large number of game media, and a plurality of types of specific game states having different expected values of the game media that can be acquired (a state in which the player can acquire many game media). A high-probability game state (high-probability state) with a high probability of becoming the specific game state, a high-base state (time saving state) in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are more likely to be satisfied than in a normal game state (such as a big hit with a different number of rounds) ), High probability and low base state (latent probability change state), special reach state (for example, super reach, etc.), and a state in which the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and is a movement between a specific operation (for example, a retracted position and an effect position). ) And a specific variable display pattern (for example, a super reach variation pattern including a special reach variation pattern) among a plurality of variable display patterns. In this case, the movable body effect executing means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing the movable body effect for operating the movable body from the first timing of the specific variable display (for example, the timing 1 second after the start of the variable display). A specific effect executing means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a countdown notice effect) different from the movable body effect and a portion where the CPU 120 executes the effect symbol change start process and the effect symbol change process. The movable body effect executing means includes, when the specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display, the first timing is provided. The movable body effect can be executed from a second timing (for example, the start timing of the variable display) different from that of the display means, and further, a display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an effect display device 909) and a game on the display means. Information about (for example, an interface image including a hold display, an effect probability variation counter image, and a right-handed promotion notification image. In addition, information about a controlled effect mode (for example, a mode name), information about output audio. (For example, song title), information about services using a communication terminal (for example, earned points, items, two-dimensional code), effect display associated with driving a movable accessory, mission display indicating that a mission has been completed (for example). , "I saw Super Reach A", "I saw Reach continuously"), active display corresponding to fluctuations during execution, operation promotion display, information on how to play and explanation of production. A display control means capable of displaying (.) (For example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, a portion for displaying the hold display by executing steps S90653, S90656, S90659, and S90662, and step S90684D are executed. The part that displays the effect probability change counter image and the right-handed promotion notification image by executing step S90684A An effect execution means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of executing a difficult-to-see effect (for example, a blackout notice) that makes a predetermined image displayed on the display means difficult to see (for example, a blackout notice). (Parts for executing steps S904510 and S904514) in the above, the effect executing means is a first difficult-to-see effect (for example, an interface image, right-handed promotion) that does not make information about the game difficult to see. A first blackout notice that makes it difficult to see images other than the notification image and the effect probability variation counter image, and a second difficult-to-see effect that makes it difficult to see information about the game (for example, an interface image, a right-handed promotion notification image and an effect) An example is a gaming machine capable of executing a second blackout notice) that makes an image including a probability variation counter image difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the start timing of the movable body effect can be changed depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed in the immediately preceding variable display, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, in the first difficult-to-see production, since the information related to the game is not difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

As a variable display, when the variable display of the effect symbol is executed by a display means (effect display device 5, 909, etc.) capable of displaying an image, the effect symbol that is variablely displayed by the display means is information related to the game. Will be included in. Further, as a variable display, when the variable display of the effect symbol is executed by a display means (segment type LED display device, drum type display device, belt type display device, etc.) that cannot display an image, the variable display is performed by the display means. The produced design will not be included in the information about the game. Even if it is an LED display device, when the dot matrix type LED display device or the like executes variable display of the effect symbol, the dot matrix type LED display device or the like can display an image, and thus the display means. The effect symbols that are displayed in a variable manner will be included in the information related to the game.

Further, when the movable body in the movable body effect operates so as to overlap the front surface of the display screen of the display means (effect display device 5, 909, etc.) capable of displaying an image, the movable body effect is difficult to see. Will be included. When the movable body is located in front of the display screen, depending on the degree of overlap of the movable body with respect to the display screen, there are cases where the first visibility difficulty effect is achieved and the second visibility difficulty effect is achieved. That is, when the movable body is located in front of the display screen, a part of the display screen can be visually recognized, and when information about the game is displayed on the part, the first visual difficulty effect is obtained and the entire display screen is displayed. If is not visible, the second visual difficulty effect is obtained. Even if a part of the display screen can be visually recognized, if the information about the game is not displayed on the part, the effect is the second difficult-to-see effect.

Further, as an example of the form of the game machine capable of improving the game entertainment and preventing the deterioration of the game interest, a display means (for example, an effect display device) capable of displaying a game and displaying an image is a game machine capable of performing the game. 909) and information about the game on the display means (for example, an interface image including a hold display, an effect probability variation counter image, and a right-handed promotion notification image. In addition, information about a controlled effect mode (for example, a mode name). , Information about the output voice (for example, song title), information about the service using the communication terminal (for example, earned points, items, two-dimensional code), effect display by driving the movable accessory, mission achieved Mission display indicating that you have done (for example, "I saw Super Reach A", "I saw Reach continuously"), active display corresponding to the fluctuation during execution, operation promotion display, how to play and directing A portion for displaying the hold display by executing steps S90653, S9066, S90659, and S90662 in the display control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of displaying the information related to the explanation. And the part that displays the effect probability change counter image by executing step S90684D and the part that displays the right-handed promotion notification image by executing step S90684A), and the predetermined image displayed on the display means is difficult to see. The effect executing means is provided with an effect executing means (for example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 for executing steps S904510 and S904514) that can execute an effect that is difficult to see (for example, a blackout notice). As a difficult-to-see effect, the first difficult-to-see effect that does not make the information about the game difficult to see (for example, the first blackout notice that makes the image excluding the interface image, the right-handed promotion notification image, and the effect probability change counter image difficult to see). , A second hard-to-see effect that makes information about the game difficult to see (for example, a second blackout notice that makes the image including the interface image, the right-handed promotion notification image, and the effect probability variation counter image difficult to see) can be executed. A game machine can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 904 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and is formed by the player. A stick controller 90122 is attached which can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right). The stick controller 90122 is designated by a player holding the operating rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and pressing and pulling the stick controller 90122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 90121 (see FIG. 36) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 90125 (FIG. 36) that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 90121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 90122. 36) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 36) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 90122. Further, the stick controller 90122 includes a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIG. 36) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

On the member forming the ball striking plate (upper plate) 903, for example, the player presses a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate main body on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 90122) to perform a predetermined instruction operation. A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 90124 (see FIG. 36) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 34, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be set to be closer to the left or right on the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. The display screen of the effect display device 909 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". The symbol display area has "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 in accordance with the variable display, and the second special When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display device 908b, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized and fluctuated with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 909 is not the jackpot symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In this embodiment, the case where the effect display variable display is performed as the effect of the liquid crystal display on the effect display device 909 is shown, but the effect performed by the effect display device 909 is the one shown in this embodiment. Not limited to this, for example, an effect having a predetermined story may be executed, and an effect of displaying the result of the story based on the result of the jackpot determination or the determination of the fluctuation pattern may be executed. For example, in a professional wrestling or soccer match or a battle production in which enemy and ally characters fight, if it is a big hit, a production that wins the game or battle is performed, and if it is out of the game, a production that loses the game or battle is performed. May be good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result of victory or defeat, it is possible to execute an effect in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909, fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d for displaying the fourth symbol following the effect symbol and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol and the second symbol display area 909c for which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol described later. A fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variation display of the effect symbol varies on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing the production using the effect display device 909, for example, the effect content including the variation display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production is diversifying, such as the production of production and the production of moving objects blocking all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 909, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, is it currently in the variable display state by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909? Whether or not it can be reliably recognized. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed in a variable manner with a constant operation, and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are used. The fourth symbol display area 909d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol are synchronized. "Synchronization" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, it is displayed in a display color (display color different from the off) reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol. To. For example, when it is off, it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. The display color may be different depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot). In addition, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the jackpot can be expected to win a game ball to the jackpot, and if it is possible to control multiple types of jackpots with different numbers of rounds, the jackpot The display color may be different depending on the number of rounds continued in the game. Further, even if the number of rounds of each jackpot is the same, for example, the opening time of the jackpot per round is short (for example, 1 second), and the jackpot that cannot be expected to win a game ball to the jackpot is practically And, if the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening, it is practically to the big winning opening. The display color may be different depending on whether or not the winning of the game ball can be expected. In addition, for example, even if there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, the big winning is practically a big prize. The display color may be different depending on whether or not the winning of the game ball to the mouth can be expected.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, it is displayed in the display color (display color different from the off) reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol. To. For example, when it is off, it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. The display color may be different depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot). In addition, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the jackpot can be expected to win a game ball to the jackpot, and if it is possible to control multiple types of jackpots with different numbers of rounds, the jackpot The display color may be different depending on the number of rounds continued in the game. Further, even if the number of rounds of each jackpot is the same, for example, the opening time of the jackpot per round is short (for example, 1 second), and the jackpot that cannot be expected to win a game ball to the jackpot is practically And, if the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening, it is practically to the big winning opening. The display color may be different depending on whether or not the winning of the game ball can be expected. In addition, for example, even if there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, the big winning is practically a big prize. The display color may be different depending on whether or not the winning of the game ball to the mouth can be expected.

The display colors of the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d when the lights are turned off are different from the background image (for example, black) in order to prevent them from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing when the lights are turned off. It is desirable to have.

In this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown, but a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED is used separately from the effect display device 909. The fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the fluctuation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Depending on whether it is displayed or not, it may be indicated whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are associated with each other and separate fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are provided, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbol may be provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. Further, a fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized by using a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display in which the display of different display colors is repeatedly turned on and off at regular time intervals. Further, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, for example. , The variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by displaying the lights and turns off repeatedly at different time intervals. Further, for example, the same jackpot symbol is used when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol. However, the stop symbol of a different mode may be stopped and displayed.

On the right side of the effect display device 909, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 908a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 909 (to the right of the first special symbol display 908a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is displayed. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 908b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 908b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 9014 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winning) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a. In this embodiment, when the game ball is launched into the area on the left side of the game area 907 (so-called left-handed), the game ball is configured to be able to win a prize in the first start winning opening 9013. There is.

Further, on the right side of the effect display device 909, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a gate 9032 through which the game ball can pass and a second starting winning opening 9014 through which the game ball can win is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. In this embodiment, when the game ball is launched into the area on the right side of the game area 907 (so-called right-handed), the game ball can pass through the gate 9032 and the second start winning opening 9014. It is configured so that you can win a prize. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. Further, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely easy to win the second starting winning opening 9014.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the variable winning ball device 9015 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9013 and the second. A variable winning ball device that opens and closes each of the starting winning openings 9014 may be provided.

Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b consisting of four indicators that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided, and a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, a hold storage display unit 9018c for displaying either the first hold storage number or the second hold storage number is provided. For example, the hold storage display unit 9018c displays the first hold storage number in the low base state, while displaying the second hold storage number in the high base state. The first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be displayed individually. Further, a total hold storage display unit for displaying the total number of hold storages, which is the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number, may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the variable display start condition. Further, in such a configuration, in the total hold storage display unit, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are displayed side by side in the order of winning the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. , The first hold memory or the second hold memory is displayed in a recognizable manner (for example, the first hold memory is displayed in red and the second hold memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

Hereinafter, the hold storage display unit 9018c and the range surrounding the hold storage display unit 9018c may be collectively referred to as an “interface image”.

The effect display device 909 is used for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. Variable display of the production symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34, a special variable winning ball device 9020 forming a large winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and is specified when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. It is controlled by the game state. The specific display result is a predetermined display result. For example, in this embodiment, there is a jackpot symbol. The specific gaming state is to change the variable winning means that can be changed into the first state that is advantageous to the player and the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state, and in this embodiment, the open state. There is a big hit game state in which the special variable winning ball device 9020 that can be changed to the closed state and the closed state is opened. For example, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the specific display result, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the specific gaming state. In each specific game state, the open / close plate in the closed state is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 9023. In this embodiment, the game ball is configured to be able to win a prize in the large winning opening when a right-handed hit is made.

On the left side of the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014). Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one. Furthermore, the probability variation state, which is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) Then, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball device 9015 may shift to a high base state in which the opening time and the number of times of opening are increased.

At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 905 and launches the game ball into the game area 907 using the rotational force of the drive motor (not shown). ) Is provided. In this embodiment, a hitting ball launching device capable of launching 100 balls per minute (one ball every 0.6 seconds) is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 907 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907.

When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the first 1), the first special symbol display 908a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (4).

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the second special symbol is displayed. 2), the second special symbol display 908b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (4).

In this embodiment, in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot, the game state is shifted to the high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won a prize (that is, the special symbol indicators 908a, 908b and the like. It shifts to a high base state which is a game state controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display in the effect display device 909 can be easily satisfied). In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not achieved. It becomes easier to win a starting prize.

The "15R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted and the time is shortened. Will also be migrated.) Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

The "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 4 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted and the time is shortened. Will also be migrated.) Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

It should be noted that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), it shifts to a normal symbol probability variation state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, it may shift to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened increases. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased, and the starting winning state becomes easy (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is the probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 9010 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time reduction state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 increases, and the start winning is easy to win (high base state).

In addition, by shifting to the time saving state (special symbol time saving state) in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the fluctuation of the effect symbol is started more frequently (in other words, the reserved memory is digested faster) and an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, a valid start winning prize is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is performed increases.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high). It may move to the base state).

FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 35 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built into the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 9056 and a RAM 9055 built-in, and the ROM 9054 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 also includes a random number circuit 90503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all of the RAM 9055 is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 9055 is backed up by the power supply.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 9031.

The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is the time when the numerical data is read (extracted), it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value.

The random number circuit 90503 has a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection function. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random number can be improved.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 90503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 90560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as ROM 9054 (ID number assigned by a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 90560). The numerical data obtained by the row is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 90503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 90503 can be further improved.

Further, an input driver circuit 9058 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. The main board also includes an output circuit 9059 that drives a solenoid 9016 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015 and a solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on the 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a for variably displaying a special symbol, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold storage. The display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 is performed.

An information output circuit 9064 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 90160 is also mounted on the main board 9031.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. It receives the effect control command and controls the display of the effect display device 909 that variably displays the effect symbol.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080 controls the display of the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 9035, and from the speaker 9027 via the sound output board 9070. Controls the sound output of.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control CPU 90101 and an effect control microcomputer 90100 including a RAM for storing information related to the effect such as an effect symbol process flag. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up by the power supply. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to a program stored in the built-in or external ROM (not shown), and the capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( The effect control command is received via the input driver 90102 and the input port 90103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to control the display of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, the VDP 90109 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 90101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 90109 according to the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for. The VDP90109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 90101. Then, the VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90102 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90102 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 36 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. 35. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 90121 of the stick controller 90122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 90125 via the input port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 90120 has been detected from the push sensor 90124 via the input port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 90122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 via the input port 90106. .. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 vibrates the stick controller 90122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port 90105.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 9035 via the output port 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

In the lamp driver board 9035, the signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED driver 90352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 9028 based on a signal for driving the LED.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706 to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order. Further, the voice synthesis IC 90703 generates a voice and outputs the voice to the speaker 9027 when a predetermined request is received from the effect control board 9080.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the high level of the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 90560. Is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid or not. , The main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode of the maskable interrupt is set (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). In step S902, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 90560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is obtained. Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 automatically sets the interrupt prohibited state and saves the contents of the program counter on the stack.

Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S904). By the process of step S904, the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are set (initialized).

The game control microcomputer 90560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets the RAM 9055 to an accessible state (step S905), and shifts to the clear signal check process.

Note that software delay processing may be executed to delay the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) that controls the progress of the game by software. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay processing is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted by the game control board (main board 9031) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 9037). Can be prevented.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S906). The CPU 9056 may check the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may check the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, after confirming that the state of the clear signal is in the off state, a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and then the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, after confirming that the state of the clear signal is in the off state at this time, the state of the clear signal may be reconfirmed again after a delay time of a predetermined time. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, and may be three or more. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

If the clear switch is not turned on in step S906, whether or not the data protection process of the backup RAM area (for example, the process when the power supply is stopped such as the addition of parity data) is performed when the power supply to the game machine is stopped. Confirm (step S907). In this embodiment, when the power supply is stopped, a process for protecting the data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such a power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 9056 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop has been saved. .. When it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing.

Whether or not the power supply stop processing has been performed depends on the value of the backup monitoring timer saved in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing according to the execution of the power supply stop processing (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop processing has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop processing, and the flag is set in step S907. After confirming that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop processing has been performed.

If it is determined that the control state at the time of power supply stop is saved, the CPU 9056 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S908). In this embodiment, the clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. In addition, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checkedsum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is subtracted by 1. The above process is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 9056 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area, and sets the inverted data as the checksum.

In the power supply stop processing, the checksum is calculated by the same processing as the above processing, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S908, the calculated checksum and the stored checksum are compared. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (process in steps S901 to S9014) executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is performed. Execute.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S9041 and S9042, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and not yet. This is the part where the data indicating the number of payout prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9043). Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9044). Then, the process proceeds to step S9015.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). The entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and the predetermined data may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the business area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a buffer for ordinary symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball flag, a ball out flag, etc. are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for performing.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9013), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S9014). As the initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909, an initialization command for the payout control board 9037, and the like can be used.

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90503 (step S9015).

Then, the CPU 9056 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) (for example). Step S9016). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 9056 first sets the interrupt disabled state (step S9017), executes the initial value random number update process (step S9018a) and the display random number update process (step S9018b). The interrupt permission state is set again (step S9019). That is, the CPU 9056 is in the interrupt prohibited state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and is in the interrupt enable state when the execution of the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process is completed. To.

The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a judgment random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot, or a random number for determining a game state to be shifted to a probabilistic state. Initial count value of a counter (random number generation counter for judgment), etc. for generating a random number for determining probability variation, a random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol) It is a random number for determining the value. Game control processing described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls a game device such as an effect display device 909, a variable winning ball device 9015, and a ball payout device 9097 provided in the game machine by itself, or In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, which is also called the game device control process), when the count value of the determination random number generation counter goes around once, the initial value is set in the counter.

The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 908. In this embodiment, as display random numbers, a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern for determining a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol and a random number for reaching determination for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated are used. Used. Further, the display random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

Further, when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt prohibited state is also executed in the timer interrupt process described later in the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process (that is, the timer). The same process is executed in steps S9026 and S9027 of the interrupt process), so that the process does not conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt occurs during the processing of steps S9018a and S9018b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, the count value is counted. Value continuity may be compromised. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt prohibition state is set during the processing of steps S9018a and S9018b.

Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during the execution of the main process, specifically, during the period during which the interrupt is permitted during the execution of the loop process of steps S9017 to S9019, the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 causes the CPU 9056 to perform the game control. Executes the timer interrupt process that is started when the timer interrupt occurs. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 9056 first executes a power cut process (power cut detection process) for detecting whether or not a power cut signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) (step S9020). Then, the CPU 9056 inputs the detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 9058, and detects the input of each switch. (Switch processing: step S9021). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is on, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by +1.

Next, the CPU 9056 executes a display control process for controlling the display of the special symbol display 908, the normal symbol display 9010, the special symbol hold storage display 9018, and the normal symbol hold storage display 9041 (step S9022). For the special symbol display 908 and the normal symbol display 9010, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9036 and S9037.

Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning notification process for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning in the large winning opening and performing an abnormality notification (step S9024). Specifically, when the CPU 9056 detects the input of the count switch 9023 even though the large winning opening is closed, the CPU 9056 transmits an abnormality detection designation command indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Take control.

After step S9024, the CPU 9056 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S9025). ). Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S9026). Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S9027).

Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1'(MR1'): Determine the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2'(MR2'): Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type)
(3) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 4'(MR4'): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining the initial value of random 4')
(6) Random 6'(MR6'): Determine the type per normal symbol (for determining the type per normal symbol)
(7) Random 7'(MR7'): Determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (variation time) (for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern)

In step S9025, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a counter for generating (1) a random number for determining a jackpot type, (4) a random number for determining a normal symbol hit, and (6) a random number for determining a normal symbol hit type. Is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display (random 2', random 3', random 7') or random numbers for initial value (random 5').

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol process process (step S9028). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the game state. In addition, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S9029). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect symbol command control process: step S9030). It should be noted that the fact that the fluctuation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol means that the fluctuation time (variable display period) is the same.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as a start port signal, a symbol confirmation number 1 signal, a symbol confirmation number 2 signal, a jackpot 1-3 signal, and a time saving signal supplied to the hall management computer. (Step S9031).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (step S9032). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 9037 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine, is executed (step S9033). Further, in this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port. (Step S9034: output processing). Then, the CPU 9056 executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of reserved storages (step S9035).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9036). Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S9037).

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a status indicator display process for setting the status display control data for displaying each status indicator in the output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S9038). In this case, when the gaming state is also controlled to the high probability state (for example, the probability change state), the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may try to do it.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9039), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9039 (excluding steps S9031 and 9033) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the effect display device 909, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not reach the reach state may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally out of place") variable display mode when the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol.

When the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the effect display device 909, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after the reach state is reached, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not finally become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "out of reach".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 909L, 909C, and 909R of the effect display device 909.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 39, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1'-1 to 1 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach". Non-reach PA1'-4 variation patterns are available. Further, as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "reach", normal PA2'-1 to normal PA2'-2 and normal PB2'-1 to normal Fluctuation patterns of PB2'-2, Super PA3'-1 to Super PA3'-2, and Super PB3'-1 to Super PB3'-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 39, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1'-4, which is used when the reach is not reached and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, is re-variated once. Among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2'-1 is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1'-2 used when the reach is not reached is a fluctuation pattern for shortening fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the effect symbol is shortened to a short time (3.0 seconds in this example). To. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2'-2 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the super PA3'-1 to the super PA3'-2 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation is to temporarily stop the effect symbol that is temporarily out of alignment from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed, and then re-execute the variable display of the effect symbol. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in this embodiment, as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the jackpot symbol, normal PA2'-3 to normal PA2'-4, normal PB2'- Fluctuation patterns of 3 to normal PB2'-4, super PA3'-3 to super PA3'-4, and super PB3'-3 to super PB3'-6 are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, when the normal PB2'-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2'-4 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when Super PA3'-3 to Super PA3'-4 are used, the re-variation is performed three times.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is 32. It is fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds), but even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, for example. , The fluctuation time may be different depending on the total number of reserved storages. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the fluctuation time may be shortened as the total number of reserved storages increases. Further, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be different according to the first reserved storage number. 2 When the variable display of the special symbol is performed, the variable time may be made different according to the second reserved storage number. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved storage number 0 to 2 and the reserved storage number 3, 4). The determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number to make the fluctuation time different.

In this embodiment, as the super reach effect, a super reach A in which the ally character plays against the boss character A and a super reach B in which the ally character plays against the boss character B are provided. In any super reach, if the ally character wins, it will be a big hit, and if it is defeated, the loss will be displayed. The super reach A is an effect that makes it difficult to see an image (for example, a background image) excluding the interface image, the right-handed promotion notification image, and the effect probability variation counter image, which will be described later, and the super reach B is the interface image, right, which will be described later. This is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize an image including a striking promotion notification image and an effect probability variation counter image.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching, when super PB3'-5 to super PB3'-6 is used, it is once displayed that it will be out of the range after the corresponding super reach, and then a relief effect is produced. After that, a big hit is displayed.

The relief effect is an effect that notifies that a big hit will occur after it is suggested that the item is out of order. In this embodiment, the common relief effect is executed regardless of which super reach was executed immediately before the off-display is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when Super Reach A is executed, a relief effect to win the boss character A can be executed, and when Super Reach B is executed, a relief effect to win the boss character B can be executed. It may be.

In this embodiment, since only Super PB3'-5 to Super PB3'-6 without pseudo-ream is provided as the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the relief effect, it develops into super reach after pseudo-ream. The player will recognize that the relief effect will not occur if the display is off. Therefore, if a variation pattern accompanied by a relief effect is provided together with the pseudo-ren, the player is expected to perform the relief effect even if the pseudo-ren develops into a super reach and the display is off. Can be given.

Further, in this embodiment, when the off display is performed after the super reach ends, the player is notified of the end of the super reach between the end of the super reach and the start of the off display. The normal return effect for displaying the normal return display on the full screen of the effect display device 9'is executed. From the end of Super Reach A to the start of the off display, the normal return display A that dims the entire screen is displayed, and from the end of Super Reach B to the start of the off display. , Display a predetermined character and display a normal return display B that darkens the surroundings of the predetermined character. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the normal return display A may be referred to as "normal return effect A", and the effect of displaying the normal return display B may be referred to as "normal return effect B".

FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect contents in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach. Here, the production contents of the fluctuation pattern without the pseudo-ream will be described. In FIG. 40 (A), it is once displayed that the super PB3'-3, which is a big hit after the super reach A, the super PB3'-1, which is a big hit after the super reach A, and the super PB3'-1 which is a miss after the super reach A. After that, the contents of the production with Super PB3'-5, which becomes a big hit after the relief production, are shown.

For example, the display before the reach is performed from the timing T0 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the display of the normal reach is performed from the timing T1 which becomes the reach, and the super reach A is executed from the timing T2 when the reach develops. At that time, when the fluctuation pattern is Super PB3'-3, the Super Reach A victory effect in which the ally character wins the boss character A is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern is Super PB3'-1,3'-5. In, a super reach A defeat effect is executed in which a ally character is defeated by an enemy character, the boss character A.

When the fluctuation pattern is Super PB3'-3, the jackpot display is performed from the timing T3 at which the super reach effect ends to the timing T5 (22.75 seconds after the start of fluctuation) at which the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. .. When the fluctuation pattern is super PB3'-1, the normal return effect A is performed from the timing T3 at which the super reach effect ends to the predetermined timing T4, and then the timing T5 (variation start) at which the variation of the special symbol ends. After 22.75 seconds), the display is off. When the fluctuation pattern is super PB3'-5, the deviation display is performed after the normal return effect A is performed from the timing T3 at which the super reach effect ends to the predetermined timing T4, and the timing T5 (22 from the start of fluctuation) is displayed. The relief effect is started (.75 seconds later), and the jackpot display is performed from the timing T6 at which the relief effect ends to the timing T7 (32.75 seconds after the start of fluctuation) at which the change of the special symbol ends.

In this embodiment, there is a variation pattern corresponding to the effect pattern A in which the jackpot display is performed after the super reach A victory effect, and an effect pattern in which the relief effect and the jackpot display are performed after the super reach A defeat effect is followed by the off display. Although the fluctuation patterns corresponding to B are different fluctuation patterns, they may be common fluctuation patterns. For example, when the fluctuation time in the common fluctuation pattern is 32.75 seconds, the production time of the production pattern A is 22.75 seconds, and the production time of the production pattern B is 32.75 seconds, the production pattern A When executing the effect, a video before the start of the jackpot showing that the jackpot starts in the period from the timing when the effect of the effect pattern A ends (22.75 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) to the stop of the fluctuation is displayed. It may be displayed. As a result, the effect pattern can be increased without increasing the number of fluctuation patterns, so that the storage capacity can be saved.

In FIG. 40 (B), it is once displayed that the super PB3'-4, which is a big hit through the super reach B, the super PB3'-2, which is a big hit after the super reach A, and the super PB3'-2, which is a miss after the super reach A. After that, the contents of the production with Super PB3'-6, which becomes a big hit after the relief production, are shown.

For example, the display before the reach is performed from the timing Ta at which the change of the special symbol is started, the normal reach is displayed from the timing Tb that becomes the reach, and the super reach A is executed from the timing Tc at which the reach develops. At that time, when the fluctuation pattern is Super PB3'-4, the Super Reach A victory effect in which the ally character wins the boss character B is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern is Super PB3'-2, 3'-6. Is executed as a super reach B defeat effect in which a ally character is defeated by an enemy character, the boss character B.

When the fluctuation pattern is Super PB3'-4, the jackpot display is performed from the timing Td at which the super reach effect ends to the timing Tf (25.50 seconds after the start of fluctuation) at which the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. .. When the fluctuation pattern is super PB3'-2, the normal return display A is performed from the timing Td at which the super reach effect ends to the predetermined timing Te, and then the timing Tf (variation start) at which the fluctuation of the special symbol ends. After 25.50 seconds), the display is off. When the fluctuation pattern is super PB3'-6, the normal return display A is performed from the timing Td at which the super reach effect ends to the predetermined timing Te, and then the deviation display is performed, and the timing Tf (25 from the start of fluctuation) is displayed. The relief effect is started (.50 seconds later), and the jackpot display is performed from the timing Tg at which the relief effect ends to the timing Th (35.50 seconds after the start of fluctuation) at which the change of the special symbol ends.

In this embodiment, there is a variation pattern corresponding to the effect pattern C in which the jackpot display is performed after the super reach B victory effect, and an effect pattern in which the relief effect and the jackpot display are performed after the super reach B defeat effect is followed by the off display. Although the fluctuation patterns corresponding to D are different fluctuation patterns, they may be common fluctuation patterns. For example, when the fluctuation time in the common fluctuation pattern is 35.50 seconds, the production time of the production pattern C is 25.50 seconds, and the production time of the production pattern D is 35.50 seconds, the production pattern C When executing the effect, a video before the start of the jackpot indicating that the jackpot starts in the period from the timing when the effect of the effect pattern D ends (25.50 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) to the stop of the fluctuation is displayed. It may be displayed. As a result, the effect pattern can be increased without increasing the number of fluctuation patterns, so that the storage capacity can be saved.

In this embodiment, the case where the hit is a big hit is configured so that the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the super reach A is more easily selected than the case where the big hit is a big hit, and the case where the big hit is a big hit. It is configured so that the fluctuation pattern with super reach B is more easily selected than that, that is, the reliability for the jackpot is super reach B> super reach A.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the grand prize opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 9056 detects that the game ball has won the first start opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 9013, or the second start winning opening 9014. If the second start opening switch 9014a for the operation is turned on, that is, if the start winning prize to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is performed. Execute (steps S90311 and S90312). Then, any of the processes of steps S90300 to S90307 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 9013a or the second starting opening switch 9014a is not turned on, any of steps S90300 to S90307 is performed according to the internal state.

In the start port switch passing process (step S90312), the CPU 9056 performs the random number circuit 90503 or software random number when the first start port switch 9013a is on and the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (4). The value is extracted from the counter for generating the above, and the process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, random R'(random number for jackpot judgment) which is a hardware random number, random number for jackpot type judgment (random 1') which is a software random number, random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment (random 2'), and fluctuation pattern judgment Random numbers (random 3') are extracted and stored in the storage area. Then, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

Further, when the second start port switch 9013b is on and the second reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (4 pieces), the value is extracted from the random number circuit 90503 or the counter for generating the software random number. , The process of storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, random R'(random number for jackpot judgment) which is a hardware random number, random number for jackpot type judgment (random 1') which is a software random number, random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment (random 2'), and fluctuation pattern judgment Random numbers (random 3') are extracted and stored in the storage area. Then, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

The processes of steps S90300 to S90307 are as follows.

Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total reserved memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If you want to make a big hit, set the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing (step S90300), the CPU 9056 controls to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current gaming state. Specifically, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the probability change state background designation command when the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the normal state background designation command if the probability change flag is not set.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90302 (2 in this example).

In the variation pattern setting process (step S90301), the CPU 9056 is the first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started according to the special symbol to start the variation, or the first symbol variation designation command. 2 Control is performed to transmit a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display (variation) of the special symbol is started to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

Display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90303 (3 in this example).

Specifically, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result 2 designation command indicating that the 15R probability variation jackpot is obtained when the 15R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a display result 3 designation command indicating that the 4R probability variation jackpot is achieved when the 4R probability variation jackpot is reached. It is transmitted, and when it is out of order, it indicates that it is out of order.

Processing during special symbol change (step S90303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90100 is notified of the symbol. Controls the transmission of the confirmation designation command, and updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the fourth symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Further, in the special symbol change processing (step S90303), the CPU 9056 specifies that the first hold storage number has decreased by 1 when the change of the first special symbol is started. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, the effect control micro is issued a second hold storage number subtraction specification command that specifies that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1. Controls transmission to the computer 90100.

Special symbol stop processing (step S90304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). If the jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process is displayed as a special symbol. It is set in the output buffer for setting control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Further, in the special symbol stop processing (step S90304), when a big hit occurs, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit a big hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit game to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, when the type of jackpot is 15R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is 4R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted.

Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S90305): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90306 (6 in this example). The large winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the large winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S90306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the jackpot game state to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the jackpot, and the like are performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

Jackpot end processing (step S90307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

Further, in the jackpot end processing (step S90307), the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the jackpot end designation command for designating the end of the jackpot game to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, when the type of jackpot is 15R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot end 1 designation command is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is 4R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot end 2 designation command is transmitted.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S90701). ..

After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step). S90704).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the effect control process process (step S90705). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 909 is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the fourth symbol process process (step S90706). In the fourth symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state in the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

After step S90706, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol is executed (step S90707). After that, the process proceeds to step S90702.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main board 9031. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 42 and 43) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

44 to 46 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616). As described above, the variation pattern command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the variation pattern setting process (step S90301).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 3 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S90618A). As described above, the display result designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received. As described above, the symbol confirmation designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the special symbol changing process (step S90303).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designated command or a jackpot start 2 designated command (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the jackpot start 1 designated command reception flag or the jackpot start 2 designated command reception flag (step S90621). Step S90622). In this embodiment, the jackpot start 1 designated command reception flag and the jackpot start 2 designated command reception flag set in step S90622 are also referred to as fanfare flags. As described above, the jackpot start designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the special symbol stop processing (step S90304).

If the received effect control command is a normal state background specification command (step S90679), the effect control CPU 90101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen according to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Change to (background screen) (step S90680). As described above, the normal state background designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the special symbol normal processing (step S90300).

Then, when the effect probability change flag indicating that the state is in the probability change state is set, the effect probability change flag is reset (Y, S90681 in step S90680A), and the game ball is launched into the area on the right side of the game area 907. The right-handed promotion notification for prompting the player to (so-called right-handed) is terminated (step S90681A), the effect probability variation counter display indicating the remaining number of probabilistic variation states is terminated (step S90681B), and the display is displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c. The hold display is switched from the second hold display to the first hold display (step S90681C).

In step S90681A, a left-handed promotion notification may be further performed to urge the player to launch the game ball into the left-hand area of the game area 907 (so-called left-handed). Specifically, the effect display device 909 displays "Please return to left-handed" or "Turn the steering wheel to the left" or displays a left-pointing arrow. Left-handed promotion notification may be performed using the speaker 9027 or a light emitting member.

If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S90682), the effect control CPU 90101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 909 as a background screen (for example, a red display) according to the probability change state. Change to the color background screen) (step S90683). As described above, the probability change state background designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the special symbol normal processing (step S90300).

Then, when the effect probability change flag is not set, the effect probability change flag is set (Y, S90684 in step S90683A), and right-handed promotion notification is started (step S90684A). Specifically, the effect display device 909 displays "Right-handed", "Right-handed" or "Turn the handle to the right" or displays a right-pointing arrow. Right-handed promotion notification may be performed using the speaker 9027 or a light emitting member.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets "50" in the effect probability change counter indicating the remaining number of times in the probability change state (step S90684B), and displays the hold display to be displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c from the first hold display to the second hold display. (Step S90684C). After that, the effect probability change counter is displayed (step S90684D). Further, when the effect probability change flag is set in step S90683A, the process proceeds to step S90684D.

As described above, the normal state background designation command and the probabilistic state background designation command are commands transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the special symbol normal processing (step S90300).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number addition designation command (step S90651), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the first hold storage in the first hold storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value of the number is added by 1 (step S90652). As described above, the first hold storage number addition designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the start port switch passing process (step S90312). Then, in the normal state (if the effect probability change flag is reset), the first hold storage number display is updated (step S90653). Specifically, the first reserved storage number display is increased by one.

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage addition designation command (step S90654), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the second hold storage in the second hold storage storage area formed in the RAM. The value of the number is added by 1 (step S90655). As described above, the second hold storage number addition designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the start port switch passing process (step S90312). Then, if it is in the probability change state (if the effect probability change flag is set), the second hold storage number display is updated (step S90656). Specifically, the first reserved storage number display is increased by one.

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage subtraction designation command (step S90657), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the first hold storage in the first hold storage storage area formed in the RAM. The value of the number is subtracted by 1 (step S90658). As described above, the first hold storage number subtraction designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the special symbol change processing (step S90303). Then, in the normal state (if the effect probability change flag is reset), the first hold storage number display is updated (step S90659). Specifically, the first reserved storage number display is reduced by one.

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage subtraction designation command (step S90660), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the second hold storage in the second hold storage storage area formed in the RAM. The value of the number is subtracted by 1 (step S90661). As described above, the second hold storage number subtraction designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the special symbol change processing (step S90303). Then, if it is in the probability change state (if the effect probability change flag is set), the second hold storage number display is updated (step S90662). Specifically, the second reserved storage number display is reduced by one.

If the received effect control command is an abnormality detection designation command (step S90663), the effect control CPU 90101 starts an abnormality notification display for notifying that an abnormality has occurred (step S90664). At this time, the abnormality notification is displayed depending on whether or not the blackout notice is executed and the display mode according to the type of the blackout notice being executed. Specifically, if no blackout notice is executed, a small abnormality notification display with a small display range is displayed, and if the first blackout notice is executed, a medium abnormality notification with a larger display range than the small abnormality notification display is displayed. The display is displayed, and if the second blackout notice is executed, the large abnormality notification display having a larger display range than the medium abnormality notification display is displayed. As described above, the abnormality detection designation command is a command transmitted by the CPU 9056 in the winning notification process (step S9024).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S90691). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. 42. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs any of steps S90800 to S90807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process. It should be noted that even if the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are configured to be executed by different effect control process processes. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is executed depending on which effect control process process is executing the variation display of the effect symbol.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S98001).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S98001): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S90802).

Processing during effect symbol fluctuation (step S90802): Controls the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, and monitors the end of the fluctuation time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S90803).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to either the jackpot display process (step S90804) or the variation pattern command reception wait process (step S90800).

Big hit display process (step S90804): In the case of a big hit, after the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 909 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. For example, when a fanfare specification command for specifying the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S90805).

Processing during the round (step S90805): Display control during the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S90806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening is received, which indicates that the large winning opening is open (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S90807): The effect display device 909 performs display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. For example, when the ending specification command for specifying the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 47. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S90812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S98001) (step S90813).

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S98001) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 47. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S908001). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the effect symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S908001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S908002). That is, by executing the process of step S908002 by the effect control CPU 90101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when the variation pattern for designating the pseudo-ream is also used, when the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90101 will perform the chance eye symbol as the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step S908002. For example, a combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but is offset by one symbol, such as "223" or "445") is also determined. The effect control CPU 90101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S908002, the effect control CPU 90101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909. In the example shown in FIG. 50, when the received display result designation command indicates "15R probability variation jackpot" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 is As the stop symbol, the combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols is determined. If the received display result specification command indicates "4R probability variation jackpot" (when the received display result specification command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 has 3 symbols as stop symbols. Determines the combination of production symbols that have the same even-numbered symbols.

Then, in the case of "off" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), the combination of the effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, the combination of the effect symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 909 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols and the numerical value are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the advance notice effect setting process for setting the advance notice effect (step S908003). Here, for example, whether or not the fluctuation to be started is a big hit, if it is a big hit, which big hit type it is, or based on the read fluctuation pattern, etc., a predetermined advance notice effect (for example, reliability for the big hit) It is determined whether or not the step-up notice that develops to the stage corresponding to the above, the button effect that switches the effect screen by accepting the operation from the player to the operation member, etc.) is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the control related to the blackout notice (steps S903901 to S903912). The blackout notice is a button effect (an effect that causes the player to operate the push button 90120 during fluctuation) or an effect that suggests the occurrence of reach by darkening the effect display device 909 and making the displayed image difficult to see. is there. Specifically, when executing the blackout notice, the display image is made difficult to see by superimposing a black image having a higher display priority than the display image on the display image, but black. The displayed image may be made difficult to see by displaying the image and erasing the displayed image. The blackout notice in this embodiment is configured to evolve in stages. For example, the first blackout notice, which has a low degree of making the image displayed on the effect display device 909 difficult to see, is executed as the first step, and the image displayed on the effect display device 909 is made difficult to see. It is possible to carry out a high second blackout notice as the second step. Specifically, the first blackout notice is a blackout notice that makes it difficult to see images other than the interface image, the right-handed promotion notification image, and the effect probability variation counter image, and the second blackout notice is the interface image, right-handed. This is a blackout notice that makes it difficult to visually recognize an image including a promotion notification image and an effect probability variation counter image.

In this embodiment, in the second blackout notice, the image including all the images that are difficult to see in the first blackout notice is made difficult to see, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first is not limited to this. It may be assumed that there is an image that is difficult to see in the blackout notice but is not difficult to see in the second blackout notice. For example, in the first blackout notice, the effect symbol may be difficult to see, but in the second blackout notice, the effect symbol may not be difficult to see. Similarly, the effect character, a part or all of the background, the preview image, and the like are made difficult to see in the first blackout notice, but may not be difficult to see in the second blackout notice.

In this embodiment, although the first blackout notice is given, if the second blackout notice is not developed, the reach and the button effect do not occur. That is, the blackout notice, which develops only up to the first stage, is provided as a so-called ghost effect. Hereinafter, the blackout notice that develops to the second stage and announces the execution of the button production is referred to as "blackout notice for button production", and the blackout notice that develops to the second stage and announces the reach is ". There is a case called "blackout notice for reach". In addition, a blackout notice that gives a first blackout notice but does not develop into a second blackout notice may be referred to as a "non-suggestion blackout notice".

First, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a button effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the button effect as a control related to the blackout notice (step S903901). The button effect is an effect in which a player operates the push button 90120 at a predetermined timing during fluctuation, and when the operation is accepted during the valid period, a specific image is displayed on the effect display device 909. In step S903901, it is determined whether or not the button effect is executed by using the button effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A).

FIG. 51 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a button effect execution lottery table. In the button effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A), the selection ratio of whether or not the button effect is executed is associated with each variable display result.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the button effect is executed and at a rate of 20% that the button effect is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the button effect is executed and at a rate of 30% that the button effect is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of the normal reach, it is determined at a rate of 60% that the button effect is executed and at a rate of 40% that the button effect is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of reach, it is determined at a rate of 10% that the button effect is executed and at a rate of 90% that the button effect is not executed.

Even in the case of a big hit, it may be determined whether or not the button effect is executed at a different ratio depending on the effect to be executed. For example, it depends on whether Super Reach or Normal Reach is executed, what kind of Super Reach is executed, whether the relief effect is executed, whether the pseudo-ream is executed, or the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream. It may be decided whether or not the button effect is executed by the ratio.

The effect control CPU 90101 sets the execution of the button effect when it is determined to execute after step S903901 (Y, S903903 in step S903902). For example, a flag indicating that the button effect is to be executed is set. After that, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a button effect blackout notice execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the button effect blackout notice (step S903904). In step S903904, it is determined whether or not to execute the button effect blackout notice by using the button effect blackout notice execution lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B).

FIG. 51 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a blackout notice execution lottery table for button production. In the button effect blackout notice execution lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B), the selection ratio of whether or not the button effect blackout notice is executed is associated with each variable display result.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the blackout notice for button effect is executed and at a rate of 20% that it is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the blackout notice for button effect is executed and at a rate of 30% that it is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of the normal reach, it is determined at a rate of 60% that the blackout notice for button effect is executed and at a rate of 40% that it is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of reach, it is determined at a rate of 30% that the blackout notice for button effect is executed and at a rate of 70% that it is not executed.

Even in the case of a big hit, it may be determined whether or not to execute the button effect blackout notice at a different rate depending on the effect to be executed. For example, it depends on whether Super Reach or Normal Reach is executed, what kind of Super Reach is executed, whether the relief effect is executed, whether the pseudo-ream is executed, or the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream. It may be decided whether or not the blackout notice for button production is executed at a rate.

When executing the button effect blackout notice after step S903904, the button effect blackout notice is set (Y, S903906 in step S903905), and the process proceeds to step S908004. In step S903906, for example, a flag indicating that the blackout notice for button effect is executed is set.

When the button effect is not executed (N in step S903902), or when the button effect is executed but the blackout notice for button effect is not executed (N in step S903905), whether or not the effect control CPU 90101 has a reach variation. Is determined (step S903907A). In the case of reach variation, a reach blackout notice execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the reach blackout notice is executed (step S903907B). In step S903907B, whether or not to execute the reach blackout notice is determined by using the reach blackout notice execution lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (C).

FIG. 51 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a blackout notice execution lottery table for reach. In the reach blackout notice execution lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (C), the selection ratio of whether or not to execute the reach blackout notice is associated with each variable display result.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 80% that the reach blackout notice is executed and at a rate of 20% that it is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the blackout notice for reach is executed and at a rate of 30% that it is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of the normal reach, it is determined at a rate of 60% that the blackout notice for reach is executed and at a rate of 40% that it is not executed.

Even in the case of a big hit, it may be decided whether or not to execute the reach blackout notice at a different ratio depending on the effect to be executed. For example, it depends on whether Super Reach or Normal Reach is executed, what kind of Super Reach is executed, whether the relief effect is executed, whether the pseudo-ream is executed, or the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream. It may be decided whether or not to execute the blackout notice for reach by a ratio.

When executing the reach blackout notice after step S903907B, the reach blackout notice is set (Y, S903909 in step S903908), and the process proceeds to step S908004. In step S903909, for example, a flag indicating that the reach blackout notice is to be executed is set.

If it is not a reach variation (N in step S903907A), or if it is a reach variation but does not execute the reach blackout notice (N in step S903908), it is not for deciding whether to execute the non-suggestion blackout notice. Suggestion blackout notice execution lottery is performed (step S903910). In step S903910, the presence or absence of execution of the non-suggestion blackout notice is determined using the non-suggestion blackout notice execution lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (D).

FIG. 51 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a non-suggestion blackout notice execution lottery table. In the non-suggestion blackout notice execution lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (D), the selection ratio of whether or not the non-suggestion blackout notice is executed is associated with each variable display result.

For example, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 80% to execute the non-suggestion blackout notice and at a rate of 20% not to execute it. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, it is determined at a rate of 70% that the non-suggestion blackout notice is executed and at a rate of 30% that it is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of the normal reach, it is determined at a rate of 60% that the non-suggestion blackout notice is executed and at a rate of 40% that it is not executed. Further, for example, when the variable display result is out of reach, it is determined at a rate of 30% that the non-suggestion blackout notice is executed and at a rate of 70% that it is not executed.

Even in the case of a big hit, it may be decided whether or not to execute the non-suggestion blackout notice at a different ratio depending on the effect to be executed. For example, it depends on whether Super Reach or Normal Reach is executed, what kind of Super Reach is executed, whether the relief effect is executed, whether the pseudo-ream is executed, or the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream. It may be decided by a percentage whether or not the non-suggestion blackout notice is executed.

When executing the non-suggestion blackout notice after step S903910, the non-suggestion blackout notice is set (Y, S903912 in step S903911), and the process proceeds to step S908004. In step S903912, for example, a flag indicating that a non-suggestion blackout notice is to be executed is set.

In step S908004, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table according to the advance notice effect when executing the variation pattern and the advance notice effect (step S908004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S908005). It should be noted that the effect of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern and the effect executed during the change such as the advance notice effect may be referred to as "variable effect".

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 90101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 909 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 909 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol). (Including the effect mode other than the effect symbol on the screen) is described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the effect time in the effect mode is set. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table, displays the effect symbol in the manner set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image and the background displayed on the display screen. Is controlled to be displayed. In addition, the blinking of the light emitter is controlled in the manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 9027 is controlled.

The process table shown in FIG. 52 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 9080. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern and the content of the advance notice effect. If it is decided to execute the advance notice effect in the process of step S908004 or the like, it is not decided to select the process table in which the data corresponding to the advance notice effect is set and execute the advance notice effect. In that case, a process table in which data corresponding to the advance notice effect is not set is selected.

Further, in the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

After step S908005, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect device (effect display device 909, speaker 9027, LED, and accessory) according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S908006). For example, the effect display device 909 outputs a command to the VDP 90109 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 9027, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S908007). Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S90802) (step S90808).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S90802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S908101) and subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer value (step S908102). When the process timer times out (step S908103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S908104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S908105).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the button effect (step S904501). Specifically, when the button effect is set in step S903903, it is determined whether or not the predetermined button effect execution timing has been reached. The button effect execution timing may be different for each fluctuation pattern, or a uniform timing (for example, 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation) is provided for any fluctuation pattern. It may be that.

In the case of the button effect execution timing, the effect control CPU 90101 displays a button operation promotion image prompting the operation to the push button 90120 on the effect display device 909 (step S904502), and is an effective period of the operation to the push button 90120. The validity period flag indicating that is set (step S904503).

After that, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the validity period flag is set (step S904504), and if it is set, has the operation to the push button 90120 been accepted (Y in step S904505)? Alternatively, when the valid period end timing is reached (Y in step S904506), a specific image is displayed (step S904507), and the valid period flag is reset (step S904508). As the valid period end timing, a different timing may be provided for each fluctuation pattern, or a uniform timing may be provided for any fluctuation pattern (for example, 3 seconds after the start of displaying the button operation promotion image). May be provided.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the first blackout notice (step S904509). Specifically, when the execution of the button effect blackout notice is set in step S903906, when the execution of the reach blackout notice is set in step S903909, the non-suggestion blackout notice is set in step S903912. It is determined whether or not the execution is set and it is the start timing of the first blackout notice determined in advance. The start timing of the first blackout notice may be different for each fluctuation pattern, or a uniform timing (for example, 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation) may be provided for any fluctuation pattern. It may be provided. Further, the set blackout notice may differ depending on whether it is a reach blackout notice, a button effect blackout notice, or a non-suggestion blackout notice.

When it is the start timing of the first blackout notice, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the first blackout notice (step S904510).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the first blackout notice (step S904511), and ends the first blackout notice if it is the end timing of the first blackout notice. (Step S904512). Specifically, when the first blackout notice is started in step S904510, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the first blackout notice determined in advance. The end timing of the first blackout notice may be different for each fluctuation pattern, or a uniform timing (for example, 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation) may be provided for any fluctuation pattern. It may be provided. Further, the set blackout notice may differ depending on whether it is a reach blackout notice, a button effect blackout notice, or a non-suggestion blackout notice.

After that, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the second blackout notice is set (step S904513). When the second blackout notice is set, that is, when the execution of the button effect blackout notice is set in step S903906, or when the execution of the reach blackout notice is set in step S903909. The second blackout notice is started (step S904514).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the second blackout notice (step S904515), and ends the second blackout notice if it is the end timing of the second blackout notice. (Step S904516). Specifically, when the second blackout notice is started in step S903514, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the second blackout notice determined in advance. As the end timing of the second blackout notice, different timings may be provided for each fluctuation pattern, or a uniform timing (for example, 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation) may be provided for any fluctuation pattern. It may be provided. Further, the set blackout notice may differ depending on whether it is a reach blackout notice or a button effect blackout notice.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S908111), the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) (step S908112).

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S90861). Then, if the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to step S90867. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S90866. Then, when the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S90868. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S90861 means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S90862. Step S90867 is performed without repeating the above steps.

If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90101 controls to stop and display the stored stop symbol (missing symbol or jackpot symbol) (step S90862). The effect control CPU 90101 may be controlled to stop and display the effect symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 90560.

When displaying the jackpot symbol in step S90862 (Y in step S90863), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S90866), resets the effect probability change flag (step S90866A), and sets the fanfare flag (step S90866A). It is confirmed whether or not the jackpot start 1 designated command reception flag or the jackpot start 2 designated command reception flag) is set (step S90867). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S90867), the effect control CPU 90101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S90868) and selects the process data according to the fanfare effect (step S90869). Then, the process timer is started (step S90870).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90804) (step S90871).

Further, when the jackpot symbol is not displayed in step S90863 (that is, when the out-of-order symbol is displayed: N in step S90863), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the effect probability change counter when the effect probability change flag is set. Subtract 1 (Y, S903202 in step S903201) and reset the predetermined flag (step S90864). For example, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the command reception flag. The effect control CPU 90101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process process or the fourth symbol process process (for example, the variation pattern command immediately after confirming the variation pattern command reception flag). You may want to reset the receive flag).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) (step S90865).

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example when the blackout notice is executed. FIG. 55 describes a display example of the effect display device 909 for each timing in the pattern of executing the non-suggestion blackout notice, the pattern of executing the reach blackout notice, and the pattern of executing the button effect blackout notice. ..

In any pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), when the fluctuation is started in the probabilistic state, the effect display device 909 has an interface image 9021, an effect probability change counter image 90212, and a right-handed strike. The promotion notification image 90213 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the first blackout notice is executed. At this time, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the images other than the interface image 90211, the effect probability variation counter image 90212, and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 in the effect display device 909.

After that, in the case of the pattern of executing the non-suggestion blackout notice, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), the fluctuation ends without developing into the second blackout notice.

Even in the pattern of executing the non-suggestion blackout notice, the effect symbol does not stop immediately after the end of the first blackout notice, but is shown in a normal fluctuation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (A)). In addition, the symbol may fluctuate at high speed in any of the symbol display areas, and may return to a state in which some kind of advance notice effect can be executed).

After executing the first blackout notice, if the pattern is to execute the reach blackout notice or the button effect blackout notice, it develops into the second blackout notice as shown in FIG. 55 (C). To do. At this time, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image including the interface image 90211, the effect probability variation counter image 90212, and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 in the effect display device 909.

Then, in the case of a pattern for executing the reach blackout notice, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), at the timing when the second blackout notice is completed, the interface image 90211 and the effect probability variation counter image in the effect display device 909 are displayed. Images including 90212 and right-handed promotion notification image 90213 can be visually recognized and reach.

Further, in the case of a pattern for executing the blackout notice for button effect, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), the interface image 90211 and the effect probability change counter in the effect display device 909 are displayed at the timing when the second blackout notice is completed. Images including the image 90212 and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 can be visually recognized, the button operation promotion image is displayed, and the button effect is started.

In this embodiment, the reach is established and the button effect is performed at the end of the blackout notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach is established and the button effect is performed during the blackout notice. May be. In that case, the establishment of reach and the button effect may not be difficult to see due to the blackout notice.

Further, when the first blackout notice shown in FIG. 55 (B) is executed, it is difficult to visually recognize the display of the effect symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect symbol may be reduced and displayed in the corner of the display area of the effect display device 909. In that case, when the second blackout notice shown in FIG. 55 (C) is executed, the reduced display effect symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as “small symbol”) becomes difficult to see (erased). Good.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 909 in the case of performing off-display after Super Reach A. For example, when the fluctuation is started in the probability change state, the interface image 9021, the effect probability change counter image 90212, and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 are displayed on the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 56 (A). There is. Then, as shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (C), it develops into Super Reach A, but the ally character is defeated by the boss character A. At this time, since the generated super reach is the super reach A, it is not difficult to visually recognize the image including the interface image 90211, the effect probability variation counter image 90212, and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 in the effect display device 909. As shown in FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (C), when the super reach A is developed, the effect symbol moves to substantially the lower right of the display area of the effect display device 909 and becomes a small symbol.

The small symbols are not limited to those that are temporarily displayed, and may be displayed at all times even during the blackout notice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), the normal return display A is displayed, so that the image including the interface image 90211, the effect probability variation counter image 90212, and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 in the effect display device 909 can be visually recognized. It will be difficult. At this time, instead of erasing the display of the effect symbol (small symbol), the variable display of the fourth symbol is performed, but the small symbol is displayed as in FIG. 56 (C). Alternatively, neither the fourth symbol nor the small symbol may be displayed (full screen is dimmed).

Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), when the normal return effect A is completed, the image including the interface image 90211, the effect probability change counter image 90212, and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 in the effect display device 909 can be visually recognized. It becomes possible, and the out-of-order symbol is displayed in motion. If the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation during execution is Super PB3'-1, the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed as it is as shown in FIG. 56 (F). If the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation during execution is Super PB3'-5, the relief effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 56 (G) and 56 (H), and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 909 in the case of performing off-display after Super Reach B. For example, when the fluctuation is started in the probability change state, the interface image 9021, the effect probability change counter image 90212, and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 are displayed on the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 57 (A). There is. Then, as shown in FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (C), it develops into Super Reach B, but the ally character is defeated by the boss character B. At this time, since the generated super reach is the super reach B, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image including the interface image 90211, the effect probability variation counter image 90212, and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 in the effect display device 909.

After that, the normal return display B is displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (D).

Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), when the normal return effect B ends, the image including the interface image 90211, the effect probability change counter image 90212, and the right-handed promotion notification image 90213 in the effect display device 909 can be visually recognized. It becomes possible, and the out-of-order symbol is displayed in motion. If the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation during execution is Super PB3'-2, the misaligned symbol is stopped and displayed as it is as shown in FIG. 57 (F). If the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation during execution is Super PB3'-6, the relief effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 57 (G) and 57 (H), and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 909 when the abnormality notification display is performed. FIG. 58 (A) shows a display example when the abnormality notification display is performed when none of the blackout notices is executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the small abnormality notification display 9025a having a small display range is displayed.

FIG. 58B shows a display example when the abnormality notification display is performed while the first blackout notice is being executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the medium abnormality notification display 9025b, which has a larger display range than the small abnormality notification display 9025a, is displayed.

FIG. 58C shows a display example when the abnormality notification display is performed while the second blackout notice is being executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the large abnormality notification display 9025c having a larger display range than the medium abnormality notification display 9025b is displayed.

In this way, the abnormality notification display when the second blackout notice is executed is the easiest to see, and the abnormality notification display when the first blackout notice is executed is the next easiest to see. The abnormality notification display when the out notice is not executed is the most difficult to see.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the display means (in this example, the effect display device 909) which is a game machine capable of executing the game and can display an image, and the display means relate to the game. Information (in this example, an interface image including a hold display, an effect probability variation counter image, and a right-handed promotion notification image. In addition, information on a controlled effect mode (mode name in this example) is output. Information about voice (in this example, song title), information about services using communication terminals (in this example, earned points, items, two-dimensional code), effect display associated with driving movable accessories, and missions have been achieved. It may be a mission display indicating that (in this example, a display such as "I saw Super Reach A" or "I saw the reach continuously"), an active display corresponding to a fluctuation during execution, an operation promotion display, or the like. A display control means capable of displaying (.) (In this example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 for displaying the hold display by executing steps S90653, S9066, S90659, and S90662, and step S90684D are executed. A part for displaying the effect probability variation counter image by performing the effect, a part for displaying the right-handed promotion notification image by executing step S90684A), and a visual recognition state in which the predetermined image displayed on the display means is difficult to see. It is provided with an effect executing means (in this example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 for executing steps S904510 and S904514) capable of executing a difficult effect (blackout notice in this example), and the effect executing means is visually recognized. As a difficult effect, the first difficult-to-see effect that does not make the information about the game difficult to see (in this example, the first blackout notice that makes the image excluding the interface image, the right-handed promotion notification image, and the effect probability change counter image difficult to see). , A second difficult-to-see effect that makes information about the game difficult to see (in this example, a second blackout notice that makes the image including the interface image, the right-handed promotion notification image, and the effect probability change counter image difficult to see) can be executed. It was decided to be. In this way, by including the first difficult-to-see effect that does not make the information related to the game difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the inability to recognize the information related to the game, and to reduce the interest in the game. Can be prevented.

The difficult-to-see state may be a state in which the image displayed on the effect display device 909 is hard to see as compared with a state in which it is not difficult to see, and it does not matter whether or not the image is visible.

In this embodiment, the blackout notice is executed as the “difficult-to-see effect”, but the effect is not limited to this as long as the image displayed on the effect display device 909 is difficult to see. For example, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a movable accessory, it is difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the effect display device 909 because the movable accessory advances to a position on the player side that overlaps with the effect display device 909. It may be the one that executes the character production that becomes "difficult to see". In that case, the accessory effect in which the movable accessory advances to a position that does not overlap with the display area of the information related to the game is defined as the "first difficult-to-see effect", and the movable accessory advances to the position that overlaps with the display area of the information related to the game. The character production may be referred to as a "second visually difficult production". Further, one of the blackout notice and the accessory effect may be referred to as the "first difficult-to-see effect" and the other may be the "second difficult-to-see effect". Further, as described above, a covering image having a higher display priority than the display image (a black image in this embodiment; an image of another color or pattern may be used) is superimposed and displayed on the display image. By doing so, the display image may be made difficult to see, or the cover image may be displayed and the displayed image may be erased to make the displayed image difficult to see. It may be something to do.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect executing means executes the first difficult-to-see effect more frequently than the second difficult-to-see effect (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 uses the second blackout notice. The first blackout notice is always executed before the execution of, and even if the first blackout notice is executed, the second blackout notice may not be executed. 1st blackout notice> 2nd blackout). As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the first blackout notice and the second blackout notice can be executed as a series of effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each can be executed as an independent effect. It may be that. For example, by independently executing the first lottery for determining whether or not the first blackout notice is executed and the second lottery for determining whether or not the second blackout notice is executed, respectively. It may be decided whether or not to execute the blackout notice. In that case, if the execution rate of the first lottery is higher than that of the second lottery, it is possible to realize that "the first difficult-to-see effect is executed more frequently than the second difficult-to-see effect". is there.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect executing means is the first effect mode in which the second difficult-to-see effect is executed after the first difficult-to-see effect is executed (in this example, the blackout notice for button effect and the blackout for reach). (Notice) and the second production mode (in this example, non-suggestion blackout notice) in which the second difficult-to-see effect is not executed after the first hard-to-see effect is executed. It was decided that it was feasible. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player, and the effect executing means is controlled to the advantageous state as a difficult-to-see effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, a super reach effect) that suggests that (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is super PA3'-1 to PA3'-4, PB3'-1 to PB3. (Steps S90804 and S908105 can be executed when any of the fluctuation patterns of ′ -6 is selected), at least the first special effect and the second special effect are performed when the execution of the specific effect is completed. A special effect executing means (in this example, a microcomputer 90100 for effect control) capable of executing any one of a plurality of types of special effects including (in this example, a normal return effect A including a normal return effect A and a normal return effect B). In step S90804 and S908105, when any of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3'-1, PA3'-2, PB3'-1, PB3'-2, PB3'-5, and PB3'-6 is selected. A notification effect execution means (in this example, a microcomputer for effect control) that can execute a notification effect (in this example, a relief effect) that notifies the control to an advantageous state after the special effect is executed. The computer 90100 includes a portion for executing steps S90804 and S908105 when any of the fluctuation patterns of Super PB3'-5 and PB3'-6 is selected), and the notification effect executing means is a special effect executing means. Therefore, the notification effect can be executed at different ratios when the first special effect is executed and when the second special effect is executed (in this example, the reliability of the jackpot indicated by the super reach effect is Super Reach A. <Because of the configuration in which the normal return effect A is performed when the type of super reach to be executed is super reach A and the normal return effect B is performed when the type of super reach is B, the normal return effect B is performed. The relief effect is executed at a higher rate when the normal return effect B is performed than when the return effect A is performed). As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, whether or not the normal return effect is executed and the type of the normal return effect when the normal return effect is executed are determined in advance for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the normal return effect is executed and the type of the normal return effect when the normal return effect is executed may be determined by lottery.

Further, the reliability of the jackpot and the reliability of the stored hold memory including the jackpot hold memory may be different depending on which normal return effect is executed. For example, the normal return effect B may be performed at different ratios depending on whether or not the relief effect is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, an abnormality detecting means for detecting an abnormality (in this example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 90100 that detects that a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening despite being in a closed state). ) And an abnormality detection image (in this example, a small abnormality notification display 9025a, a medium abnormality notification display 9025b, and a large abnormality notification display 9025c) indicating that the abnormality was detected when the abnormality was detected by the abnormality detecting means. An abnormality detection image that is provided with an abnormality display means to be displayed on the display means (in this example, a portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 that executes step S90664) and is displayed when an effect that is difficult to see is being executed. However, it is easier to see than the abnormality detection image displayed when the difficult-to-see effect is not executed (in this example, it is displayed when the blackout notice is executed as shown in FIG. 58). The medium abnormality notification display 9025b and the large abnormality notification display 9025c are easier to see than the small abnormality notification display 9025a displayed when the blackout notice is not executed). This makes it possible to preferably notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

In this embodiment, an abnormality notification is displayed when none of the blackout notices is executed, when the first blackout notice is executed, and when the second blackout notice is executed. The visibility of the abnormality notification display differs depending on the size of the abnormality notification display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the visibility of the abnormality notification display may be different due to the difference in the color of the abnormality notification display and the content of the character display.

Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the abnormality notification display is different depending on whether or not the blackout notice is executed and the type of the blackout notice being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blackout is not limited to this. The abnormality notification display may be performed in a common display mode regardless of whether or not the notice is executed and the type of blackout notice being executed. Even in this case, since the area around the abnormality notification display is bordered in black while the blackout notice is being executed, the visibility is not hindered by other displays, and the blackout notice is not executed. The visibility of the abnormality notification display can be improved as compared with the above. Further, as the darkened range is larger, the visibility is not hindered by other displays, so that the visibility of the notification display can be further improved. Therefore, the abnormality notification display when the second blackout notice is executed is the easiest to see, and the abnormality notification display when the first blackout notice is executed is the next easiest to see. It becomes the most difficult to see the abnormality notification display when it is not executed.

Further, instead of or in addition to the abnormality notification in the effect display device 909 described above, the abnormality notification is performed by outputting sound from the speaker 9027, causing a predetermined light emitting member to emit light, or vibrating a predetermined vibrating member. May be done. In that case, the ease of recognizing the abnormality notification may be different depending on the presence / absence and volume of voice output, the presence / absence of light emission, the amount of light, the presence / absence of vibration, and the strength. Further, even if the volume is the same, the easiness of recognizing the abnormality notification may be different by changing the sound range and the sound effect, or the abnormality notification may be made by the light emission of the light emitting member or the display of the image on the effect display device 909. When performing the above, the ease of recognizing the abnormality notification may be different depending on the emission color or the display color. Specifically, it is an advanced color that appears to be close when compared to other colors (warm colors or bright colors, such as red), or far away when compared to other colors. The ease of recognizing the abnormality notification may differ depending on whether the color is a receding color (a cold color or a color having low lightness, for example, blue) that appears to exist.

In this embodiment, the blackout notice suggests reaching and the execution of the button effect, but the suggested event is not limited to this. For example, it may be suggested that it becomes a pseudo-ream. Further, the suggestion target may be a single event or three or more events.

Further, in this embodiment, when the reach is developed and the button effect is executed, the non-suggestion blackout notice is not executed (that is, when the reach is developed and the button effect is executed. The blackout notice always develops to the second stage), but it is not limited to this. For example, by developing the blackout notice only to the first stage, it is possible to improve the interest by executing the reach and button effects after disappointing the player once that the reach and button effects are not performed. May be.

In addition, a gaming machine capable of executing variable display, the specific display corresponding to the variable display is at least a normal mode, a first specific mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second suggesting the content of the effect. The specific display means includes a specific display means capable of displaying in any of the display modes including the specific mode, and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode. After displaying the specific display in the second specific mode, when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode is executed, the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode. It may be variable. Specifically, it will be described with reference to the following modification 1. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In the first modification, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can execute the look-ahead advance notice effect. The look-ahead notice production is a production that targets fluctuations that have not yet started. Specifically, in the first modification, by executing the hold display change that changes the display mode of the hold display, the reliability for becoming a big hit in the change corresponding to the hold display and the change corresponding to the hold display. It has a structure that can suggest the contents of the production in.

Specifically, the random R'(random number for jackpot judgment), the random number for jackpot type judgment (random 1'), the random number for variable pattern type judgment (random 2'), and the random number for variable pattern judgment (random number 2') extracted at the time of starting winning are used. Based on the random number 3'), whether or not the fluctuation corresponding to the starting prize will be a big hit, and which fluctuation pattern is used to perform the fluctuation, are at a time point before the fluctuation is started ( For example, it is determined at the time of starting winning), and the look-ahead effect can be executed based on the determination result. Hereinafter, the determination result when it is determined whether or not a big hit will be made at the time of starting a prize and which fluctuation pattern is used for the fluctuation may be referred to as a "winning judgment result". The winning determination result can be specified by the game control microcomputer 90100 based on the command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560.

In the first modification, as the display mode of the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c, a normal display mode indicating the reliability of being a big hit and an effect suggestion display mode suggesting the execution of a predetermined effect are provided. Has been done. The normal display mode includes "white" displayed in white and "red" displayed in red, and the reliability of being a big hit is gold> red> white. The effect suggestion display mode includes a special suggestion mode that suggests that the special zone effect is subject to advance notice by displaying the characters "special?". The special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected regardless of whether or not it is the target of the advance notice of the special zone effect.

The special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from the normal background by one fluctuation or a plurality of continuous fluctuations. In addition, the special zone effect has a structure in which the higher the number of executions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as "entering the special zone".

Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The rush success effect is an effect that indicates that it is confirmed to enter the special zone after suggesting that it will enter the special zone (for example, an effect that displays "success!" After displaying "special zone chance!" ).

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the special suggestion mode in the modified example 1. First, while (1) the active display 9051 and the two hold displays 9052 and 9053 are displayed, (2) a new hold memory is generated and the hold display 9054 corresponding to the hold memory is specially suggested. It is displayed in the mode (“special?”). At this time, it is decided to execute the special zone effect in which the reserved memory is the target of advance notice. At this time, the hold change pattern that changes from "white" to "red" is determined, and the first change timing (the timing at which the hold display for the change of the notice target is the first hold display) is determined. Let's say that.

Then, (3) the fluctuation ends at the deviation, and (4) the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display 9051 corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display shifts. Then, the rush notice effect is executed (image P is displayed). When 3 seconds have passed since then, (5) it is notified that the entry was successful (image P is switched and displayed), and the special zone is entered (image Q is displayed). At a timing 5 seconds after that, the display mode of the hold display 9053 displayed in (6) special suggestion mode changes to "red". This is a misunderstanding that if the hold display 9053 of the special suggestion mode is continuously displayed even after entering the special zone, there may be something related to the special zone. This is to change the display mode of the hold display that has finished its role (suggestion of entering a special zone) because it may be given to and confused.

As described above, in the first modification, the game machine capable of executing the variable display, and the specific display (in this example, the hold display and the active display) corresponding to the variable display is at least in the normal mode ( In this example, "white"), a first specific mode ("red" in this example), which has a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (in this example, a special suggestion mode) that suggests the content of the effect. ) And a specific display means that can be displayed in any of the display modes (in this example, the hold display is displayed in "white", "red", or a special suggestion mode in the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the first modification. A displayable portion (see FIG. 59)) and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (in this example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the first modification). The specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, including a portion (see FIGS. 59 (5) and (6)) in which the special zone effect suggested in the special suggestion mode can be executed. Later, when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (in this example, a modified example). As shown in FIG. 59, the effect control microcomputer 90100 of No. 1 can change the hold display 9053 displayed in the special suggestion mode to “red” 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started). I decided. Thereby, the expectation for a specific aspect can be increased.

In addition, when the blackout notice is given while the hold display is displayed in the special suggestion mode suggesting the execution of the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect (the effect suggested by the special suggestion mode) is given when the blackout notice ends. It may be what you are doing. In that case, the predetermined effect may be started from the time when the blackout notice ends, or the predetermined effect is started while the blackout notice is being executed (controllably, the predetermined effect is started). However, it may be difficult to see due to the execution of the blackout notice). Further, the hold display displayed in the special suggestion mode may be switched to another display mode (for example, "white", "red") at the end of the blackout notice. The display mode may be switched to another display mode after a lapse of a predetermined period from the end of the blackout notice.

Further, a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, and a display mode of the specific display after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect. The change effect executing means is provided with the change effect executing means capable of executing the change effect to be changed, and the change effect executing means displays the specific display according to the first aspect as the change effect, and then displays the specific display mode with a high degree of advantage. The display mode of the specific display can be changed to the second mode when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed by the first mode as the change effect. The effect of changing to the third aspect can be executed, and the specific display displayed by the third aspect may be changed to the second aspect at a lower rate than the specific display displayed by the first aspect. Specifically, it will be described with reference to the following modification 2. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In the second modification, when the execution of the hold notice effect, which is a kind of pre-reading notice effect, is decided when the start winning is generated, the hold display is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal mode (in this example, the white round display). (In this example, a blue or red circle display) is finally changed to a hold notice effect. In this modification 2, when the hold notice effect is executed, the hold display does not directly change from the normal mode to the special display mode, but the hold display is a special display mode (in this example, a triangle display or a rectangular display). There is a case where the action effect is executed at the timing of the subsequent hold shift and the hold display of the advance notice is changed to one of the special display modes. Hereinafter, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is also referred to as "normal hold", and the hold display displayed in the special display mode is also referred to as "special hold". Further, the hold display displayed by the blue display color in the special display mode is also referred to as "blue hold", and the hold display displayed by the red display color is also referred to as "red hold".

For example, in the second modification, when the start winning is generated, the effect control CPU 90101 determines the final display mode using the final display mode determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61. Then, when a display mode other than "normal hold (without passing through special hold)" described later is determined as the final display mode, the effect control CPU 90101 determines the latest winning determination result, the first hold storage number, and the final display mode. Based on this, the change pattern of the hold display to be notified is determined. Specifically, the change pattern is determined using the change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 62 and 63.

60 and 61 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in the final display mode determination table, in the final display mode determination table, as the final display mode of the hold display, normal hold (without special hold), normal hold (with special hold), and blue color. Judgment values are assigned to each of the hold and the red hold. Of these, "normal hold (via special hold)" means that after changing to special hold at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning, it will finally be changed to normal hold at the timing of the subsequent hold shift. It is a return, and the final display mode itself is usually on hold, but the hold notice effect is executed. On the other hand, "normal hold (without passing through special hold)" does not change to special hold at all, and does not change as normal hold until the hold is digested and the hold display is erased. It corresponds to the one that does not execute the production itself.

When the first hold storage number is 2, there is only one opportunity to change the hold display at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning, so there is room to change the hold display to special hold once. Absent. Therefore, in the final display mode determination table for the first hold storage number "2" shown in FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (C), only for normal hold (without passing through special hold), blue hold, and red hold. , Judgment values are assigned to each, and there is no allocation of judgment values for normal hold (via special hold).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in the second modification, the hold notice effect can be executed when the winning determination result is non-reach out of reach, super reach out of reach, or super reach jackpot. If the winning determination result is other than that, the effect control CPU 90101 decides the final display mode of the hold display as it is to "normal hold (without passing through special hold)" and does not execute the hold notice effect. decide.

The effect control CPU 90101 is shown in FIG. 60 if the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2" and the winning determination result indicates non-reach loss. If the final display mode determination table for 2 hold and non-reach loss shown in (A) is selected and the judgment result at the time of winning indicates the super reach loss, 2 hold and super shown in FIG. 60 (B). If the final display mode determination table for reach loss is selected and the judgment result at the time of winning indicates a super reach jackpot, the final display mode determination table for two hold and super reach jackpot shown in FIG. 60 (C) is used. select. Further, in the effect control CPU 90101, when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3" or "4", the winning determination result indicates non-reach loss. If this is the case, the final display mode determination table for holding 3 to 4 pieces and non-reach loss shown in FIG. 61 (D) is selected, and if the winning determination result indicates super reach loss, FIG. 61 (E). ), And if the final display mode determination table for missing the super reach is selected and the judgment result at the time of winning indicates a super reach jackpot, 3 to 4 holds shown in FIG. 61 (F). And the final display mode determination table for the super reach jackpot is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in this modification 2, in the case of a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot, a blue hold is finally performed rather than a normal hold, as compared with a case of a non-reach loss. The rate of change to red hold is high. Therefore, in this modification 2, when the hold display finally changes to blue hold or red hold, the degree of expectation (reach reliability) for super reach is higher than the case where the hold display is finally changed to normal hold. It's getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in this modification 2, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the final result is bluer than the normal hold, as compared with the case of non-reach loss or super reach loss. The rate of change to hold or red hold is high. Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in this modification 2, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the final red color is higher than that of the blue hold, as compared with the case of non-reach loss or super reach loss. The rate of change to hold is even higher. Therefore, in this modification 2, when the hold display of the notice target finally changes to red hold, the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is the highest, and when it finally changes to blue hold, the next big hit. The expectation for the jackpot (big hit reliability) is high, and the expectation for the jackpot (big hit reliability) is the lowest when the game is finally put on hold.

62 and 63 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table. In FIGS. 62 and 63, the special Δ indicates the special hold of the triangular display, and the special □ indicates the special hold of the rectangular display.

The effect control CPU 90101 shows FIG. 62 (A) when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “2” and the final display mode determined is blue holding. If the change pattern determination table for two hold and blue hold shown in FIG. 62 is selected and the final display mode determined is red hold, the change pattern determination table for two hold and red hold shown in FIG. 62 (B) is used. select.

Further, in the effect control CPU 90101, when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the determined final display mode is normal holding (via special holding). If there is, the change pattern determination table for 3 holds and normal hold shown in FIG. 62 (C) is selected, and if the final display mode determined is blue hold, 3 holds and blue shown in FIG. 62 (D). The change pattern determination table for holding is selected, and if the determined final display mode is red holding, the three holdings and the change pattern determination table for red holding shown in FIG. 62 (E) are selected.

Further, when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 90101 determines that the final display mode is normal holding (via special holding). If there is, the change pattern determination table for 4 holds and normal hold shown in FIG. 63 (F) is selected, and if the final display mode determined is blue hold, 4 holds and blue shown in FIG. 63 (G). Select the change pattern determination table for hold. Further, if the determined final display mode is red hold, and if the winning determination result indicates non-reach loss or super reach loss, the four hold and non-reach loss / shown in FIG. 63 (H). If the change pattern determination table for the red hold is out of the super reach and the judgment result at the time of winning indicates the super reach jackpot, the four hold shown in FIG. 63 (I) and the super reach jackpot and the red hold are used. Select the change pattern determination table.

As shown in FIG. 63, in this modification 2, when the first hold storage number is “4”, the hold display to be notified is displayed as normal hold at the time of starting winning, and the timing of the first hold shift is displayed. It is configured to be changed to special hold with, and can be changed to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold at the timing of the third and subsequent hold shifts. Therefore, in this modification 2, when the hold display of the advance notice target is displayed at the fourth position (state after the start winning) and when it is displayed at the third position on the hold storage display unit 9018c. In (the state after the first hold shift), the hold display of the notice target does not change from the special hold to the normal hold, the blue hold, or the red hold. Further, as shown in FIGS. 62 (C) to 62 (E), in this modification 2, even when the first hold storage number is "3", the hold display to be notified is displayed as normal hold at the time of starting winning. Therefore, when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the third position on the hold storage display unit 9018c (the state after the start winning prize), the hold display of the notice target changes from the special hold to the normal hold or the blue hold. , Does not change to red hold. Therefore, in this modification 2, it is difficult for the hold display of the notice target to change from the special hold to the normal hold during the period when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth and third positions. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by changing the hold display of the notice target from the special hold to the normal hold at an early stage, and to prevent the effect of the hold notice effect from being lowered when the hold notice effect is executed. ..

Further, in this modification 2, the action effect can be executed at the timing of the hold shift after the special hold is displayed, and even if the action effect is executed, the hold display to be announced does not change as the special hold. It may change to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. For example, in the change patterns 401 and 403 shown in FIG. 63 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift from the special hold. Can be changed to normal hold. Further, for example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 63 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift. The special hold does not change, and the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special hold can be changed to the normal hold. As such, in this modification 2, not only the case where one action effect returns from the special hold to the normal hold but also the case where a plurality of action effects are executed and the special hold returns to the normal hold. The effect of the effect when the hold notice effect is executed can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 62 (C) to 62 (E) and FIGS. 63 (F) to 63 (I), in this modification 2, there are two types of special hold, a special hold for triangle display and a special hold for rectangular display. However, when the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed, the ratio of the red hold being displayed as the final display mode is higher than that of the case where the special hold of the triangle display is displayed. .. On the contrary, when the special hold of the triangle display is displayed, the ratio of returning to the normal hold as the final display mode is higher than that of the case where the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (H) and 63 (I), in this modification 2, even if the special hold is returned to the normal hold, the red hold is finally displayed (that is, once the normal hold is returned, it is disappointing). A change pattern (change pattern 411,414) is provided (the red hold is revived and displayed as if it was displayed), and the change pattern 411,414 of this revival pattern is set only when it becomes a super reach jackpot. Judgment values are assigned so that they can be determined. Therefore, in this modification 2, when the red hold is finally made after returning from the special hold to the normal hold, the jackpot is confirmed, which is more than the case where the special hold is simply changed to the red hold. , Expectations (reliability) for big hits are high.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 has an action effect (an effect that is executed in a mode that acts on the hold display and suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes) in the hold memory. When there is something, the action effect is executed. Whether or not the action effect can be executed is determined, for example, by checking the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area, and at the timing of the current fluctuation start (hold shift), special △ → special. △, special △ → normal hold, special △ → blue hold, special △ → red hold, special □ → special □, special □ → normal hold, special □ → blue hold, special □ → red hold It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is.

As described above, according to the modified example 2, a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, which is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display (in this example, a modified example). After displaying the specific display by the first mode (in this example, the special hold) and the portion of the effect control microcomputer 90100 in which the hold display and the active display can be displayed, the display mode of the specific display is changed. Any of the change effect execution means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the second modification 2 shown in FIGS. 62 and 63) capable of executing the change effect (in this example, the hold notice effect accompanied by the action effect). The change effect execution means displays the specific display according to the first aspect as the change effect, and then displays the display mode of the specific display. It is possible to execute the effect of changing to the second mode (in this example, blue hold or red hold) having a high degree of advantage (in this example, the change patterns 33 to 36 and FIGS. It is possible to execute the hold notice effect based on the change patterns 405 to 414 shown in 63 (G) to (I)), and as the change effect, after displaying the specific display by the first aspect, the display mode of the specific display is displayed. When not changing to the second aspect, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display aspect of the specific display to the third aspect (normally held in this example) (in this example, the change pattern shown in FIG. 62C). The hold notice effect based on the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in 31, 32 and FIG. 63 (F) can be executed), and the specific display displayed by the third aspect is larger than the specific display displayed by the first aspect. The rate of change to the second aspect is low (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the change pattern that changes from special hold to normal hold and then to red hold is stored in the first hold at the time of starting winning. There are only change patterns 411 and 414 that can be selected only when the number is 4 and it is a super reach jackpot, and the allocation of judgment values is extremely small, and the change patterns 31, 32, 401 to 404 that do not change while being normally held are judged. There are many value allocations. After changing from special hold to normal hold, it may not change to red hold.) As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

In addition, in this modification 2, the case where the special hold is displayed as the first aspect and the normal hold is displayed as the third aspect to change from the special hold to the normal hold is shown, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, the normal hold is displayed in the position of the first mode, and the third mode is a completed hold indicating that the display mode of the hold display has been changed (for example, a round display including the character display of "done"). May be configured to display.

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. I can't be limited. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Regarding the above-described embodiment, the game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to the jackpot game state based on the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol has been described, but the variable provided in the game area has been described. A game machine (so-called second type game machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in the winning ball device (so-called accessory) , It may be applied to a game machine in which the first type and the second type are combined.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state based on the jackpot type of the jackpot that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the big hit, it shifts to a probabilistic state, while the game ball passes through the specific area during the big hit. It may be such that it shifts to the normal state when it does not pass. In that case, by changing the ease of passing the game ball to the specific area depending on the jackpot type, a substantial probability variation jackpot and a non-probability variation jackpot may be realized. For example, the ease of passing the game ball to a specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening depending on the big hit type. Specifically, the big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantially probable variable big hit) in which the game ball easily passes to a specific area, and the big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is played in a specific area. It may be a big hit (substantially non-probable variable big hit) that the ball does not easily pass through.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the variation time, the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, when the variation is started, 1 Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (if it does not reach the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform the effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may do it. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

In the above embodiment, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to relationships such as A: B = 70%: 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, but the game control microcomputer 90560 is another substrate (for example, FIG. 36). The sound / lamp board having the functions of the circuits mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, etc., or the sound output board 9070 and the functions of the circuits mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). A control command may be transmitted so as to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 on the effect control board 9080 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. The effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 by executing the control related to the voice control and the lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. It may be sent to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 9070 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 9035 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 side determines whether or not a big hit is obtained and the winning judgment (look-ahead judgment) of the variation pattern type, and a command (symbol designation command) indicating the winning judgment result. , Variable category command) is transmitted, and the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the command indicating the winning determination result. , The effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a command for specifying only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R') and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') extracted when the start winning is generated. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination) based on the value of a random number specified by those commands.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is obtained in which a game medium is used as a game machine, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and is a game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as the above and gives a score when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display 4B 2nd special symbol display 5 Production display device 120 Production control CPU
400 Movable accessory 411 Accessory drive motor 901 Pachinko game machine 908a 1st special symbol display 908b 2nd special symbol display 909 Direction display device 9013 1st start winning opening 9014 2nd starting winning opening 9020 Special variable winning ball device 9027 Speaker 9031 Game control board (main board)
9056 CPU
9070 Audio output board 90560 Game control microcomputer 9080 Production control board 90100 Production control microcomputer 90101 Production control CPU
90109 VDP

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games with variable display.
Movable bodies that can perform specific actions and
When executing a specific variable display by a specific variable display pattern among a plurality of variable display patterns, it is possible to execute a movable body effect that operates the movable body from the first timing after the start of the variable display in the specific variable display. Movable body production execution means and
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the movable body effect,
With
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the specific variable display in a variable display different from the specific variable display, the movable body effect executing means is the first in the specific variable display. The movable body effect can be executed from the second timing, which is a timing before the timing.
further,
A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold storage,
Display means that can display images and
A hold display means capable of causing the display means to display a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means, and a hold display means.
It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a difficult-to-see effect that makes a predetermined image displayed on the display means difficult to see.
The effect executing means is characterized in that, as the difficult-to-see effect, a first difficult-to-see effect that does not make the hold display difficult to see and a second difficult-to-see effect that makes the hold display difficult to see can be executed. A game machine to play.

Images